2016 Dodge Challenger SRT/Hellcat Owner`s Manual

2 0 1 6

O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

Challenger

SRT/Hellcat

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA

US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA

Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

5

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

6

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

7

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

8

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

9

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

10

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6

䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7

1

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual:

INTRODUCTION 5

1

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information

Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.

VIN Location

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment.

VIN Location

NOTE:

It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

1

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ SRT Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15

䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21

䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .24

2

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

▫ Manual Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

▫ AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . .39

䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .42

▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .55

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

䡵 SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN

RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

2


A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.

Keyless Push Button Ignition

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.

The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and

ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,

ON/RUN will illuminate.

NOTE:

In case the ignition does not change with the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the

Key Fob against the engine START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition.

Keyless Push Button Ignition

1 — OFF

2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

3 — ON/RUN


SRT Key Fobs

NOTE:

SRT vehicles equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine comes with three key fobs (two red and one black) that allow for different engine power levels.

Please refer to the

⬙Drive Modes⬙ in the “Uconnect

Settings” section for further descriptions.

The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.

The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.

2


To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob

Emergency Key Removal

NOTE:

You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up.

Ignition Or Accessory On Message

When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in

ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster.

NOTE:

With the Uconnect system, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.


WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.

2

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued)

A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button

Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.

After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the

Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it


indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

• Do not make modifications or alterations to the

immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to the immobilization system may result in a loss of security protection.

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-

ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE:

Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

2

(Continued)


CAUTION!

• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and

lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,

always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position.

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE:

When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer.

Customer Key Programming

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security

Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.

Rearming Of The System

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after approximately 29 seconds, turn off all of the visual signals after

5 seconds, and then the system will rearm itself up to 8 times.


To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF” position (refer to

⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting

And Operating

⬙ for further information).

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.

• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF, and the key is physically removed from the ignition.

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry

Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the

2


same exterior zone (refer to

⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in

⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).

• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

To Disarm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter.

• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in

⬙Things To

Know Before Starting Your Vehicle

⬙ for further information).

• Advance the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.

NOTE:

• The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the

Vehicle Security Alarm.

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the alarm will sound.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Tamper Alert

If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the

Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.

Security System Manual Override

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door.


This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.

NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).

• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position

(extreme bottom position).

2


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held

Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE:

Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.

Key Fob With RKE Transmitter

To Unlock The Doors

Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Flash Lights With Lock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.


Headlight Illumination On Approach

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.

The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

To Lock The Doors

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.




Sound Horn With Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be

2


turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

To Unlatch The Trunk

Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.




Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH

(24 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:

• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic

Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on.

• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the

Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.


Transmitter Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

Emergency Key Removal

2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal, if equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the

RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.

2


Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter

Case

3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over

(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together, reposition and secure the screw as shown in step #2 for removal.


The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).


1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and


NOTE:


If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:

• A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years.

• Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).


NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range.

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

• Shift lever in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

• Battery at an acceptable charge level

2


• RKE PANIC button not pushed

• System not disabled from previous remote start event

• Vehicle security alarm not active

• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go)

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon

Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.

• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters

away from children. Operation of the Remote Start

System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

Remote Start Abort Message

The following messages will display in the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset

The instrument cluster message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Push and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if

programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during

Remote Start mode.

• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutive times with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be activated by pushing the START/STOP button twice

(or the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.


To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle

Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote

Start request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP button.

2


NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-

N-Go feature, the message “Remote start active - Push start button” will display in the Driver Information

Display (DID) until you push the START button.

Cancel Remote Start

Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur:

• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.

• Any engine warning lights come on.

• Low Fuel Light turns on.

• The hood is opened.

• The hazard switch is pushed.

• The shift lever is moved out of PARK.

• The brake pedal is pushed.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door lock knob on each door trim panel upward.

Door Lock Knob

If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the event of a

collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.


keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)




access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with



2


Power Door Locks

The power door lock switch is located on each door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

Power Door Lock Switch

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the

Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is on, and either door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the

Key Fob in the vehicle. Turning off the ignition or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open with the ignition either cycled to ACC or RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound as a reminder.

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.

When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or through the Uconnect Settings in your radio.

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

The doors will unlock automatically if:

1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.

2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).

3. The transmission is in PARK.

4. The driver door is opened.

5. The doors were not previously unlocked.

6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming

The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in



NOTE:

Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.

2


• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry door handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.

To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:

With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE:

If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver

Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock both doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.

NOTE:

All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st

Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE

Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a

Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the

Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition is in the

OFF position.


FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.

There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle.

1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter while a door is ajar.

2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is ajar.

3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is ajar.

When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a

Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car, and it does not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the car, the car will unlock and alert the customer.

2


NOTE:

The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true:

• The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs.

• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive

Entry door handle.

• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors.

To Enter The Trunk:

With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid, push the button located on the center of the light bar which is located on the deck lid above the license plate.

Trunk Passive Entry Button

NOTE:

If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive

Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock both doors.


Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle button. This could unlock the door(s).

2

Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock


NOTE:

• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.

• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.

WINDOWS

Power Windows

The window controls on the driver’s door control both of the door windows.

Power Window Switches

There is a single window control on the passenger’s door trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s door. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.


NOTE:

• The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed completely when opening the door. The window will return to its fully closed position after closing the door.

This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and seal damage.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-

N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped

The driver’s door power window switch and passenger door power window switch have an AUTO-down feature. Push the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.

2


To open the window part way, push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.

To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

The power window switches will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.

Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE

The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pushing the Trunk Release button. The button is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.

NOTE:

The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h) before the button will operate.

Trunk Release

Button

The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pushing the

Trunk Release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang. The release feature will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the

Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed.

With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.

Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know

Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.


TRUNK SAFETY WARNING

WARNING!

Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.

2


Trunk Emergency Release

As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Child Restraints

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Trunk Emergency Internal Release

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to

⬙Child Restraints⬙) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.


6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front

Air Bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under

⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙

2


WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN

position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.


Change Of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

2


BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the

Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

(Continued)


• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your

injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

(Continued)



• Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In

a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.

2

(Continued)



• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle

will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

(Continued)


• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.


3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

2

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch


plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

Positioning The Lap Belt

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a

Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the

Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.


WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically

required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.

• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can

increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

2


Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.

Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm .

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.


The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.

For additional information, refer to “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

Restraints” section of this manual. The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position.

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an

ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out

2


only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

⬙click.⬙

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic

Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.

Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!


an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front






How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

(Continued)

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the

switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could

increase the risk of injury in collisions.

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain

occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.


Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Air Bag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Advanced Front Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

2


• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Seat Track Position Sensors

Advanced Front Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air

Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.

Advanced Front Air Bags And Knee Impact Bolster

Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags

2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.


an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front





Advanced Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides


output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

2


WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air

bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag

covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional.

The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

Advanced Front Air Bag Operation

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced

Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.


Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front

Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact

bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact

bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

2


Supplemental Side Air Bags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):

Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The

SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.


When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or

“AIRBAG.”

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

2


The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

WARNING!

• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the

SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.

• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for

the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also


help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air

Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean

against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-

ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air

Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you

(Continued)

2


WARNING! (Continued) properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

Side Impacts

In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events.

The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require

Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the

Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced

Front Air Bags deploy.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.

The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A

faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.

If A Deployment Occurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags


deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

2


Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller

System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power.

• Unlock the power door locks.

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset

Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition

OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

Air Bag Warning Light

The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components.


The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag

Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag

Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

2


The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental

Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air

Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.

If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of this manual.


Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air

bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

2

(Continued)



• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag

system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.


Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children.

Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

2


WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s

Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org

or call 1–866–732–8243.

• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/ eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafetyindex-53.htm


Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and Toddlers

Small Children

Larger Children

Children Too Large for

Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age

Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint

Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint

Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible

Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

2


Infants And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.

It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.

Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.

Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!


an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front





Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do

not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in

the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

2


Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.

A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.


Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined

Weight of the

Child + Child

Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

LATCH –

Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH –

Lower Anchors

+ Top Tether

Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

X X Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

X

X X

X

2


Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)

Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install

LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In

This Vehicle


2

•

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol


What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the

LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?

No

No

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than

65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Do not use the seat belt when you use the

LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Can the head restraints be removed?

Locating LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.

You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Yes


The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.

Center only may be removed.

2

LATCH Anchorages


Locating Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.

They are found under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.

Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position.

Tether Strap Anchorages

WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing

The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section

“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.


1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

2


4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child

Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints.

An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.

If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-

stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.


Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child

Restraints in this Vehicle

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be

“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking

Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

2


What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the

Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Weight limit of the

Child Restraint

Yes

Can the head restraints be removed?

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?

Yes

No

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.

Center Only may be removed

Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat.

You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.

Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.


5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

2


strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints

Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether

Anchorage

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.


1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.

2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.

3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.

1 — Cover

3 — Attaching Strap

Tether Strap Mounting

A — Tether Strap Hook

B — Tether Anchor

4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

2


5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,

make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

SRT Engine Break-In Recommendations: The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance and maximum durability for your new SRT Vehicle.

Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through the first oil change interval.

It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in period:

0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):

• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an extended period of time.

• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.

• Avoid aggressive braking.

• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.

• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.

100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):

• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).


• Avoid aggressive braking.

• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.


300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):

• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually

(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible.

• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.


For the first 1500 mi (2414 km):

• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities during the first 1500 mi

(2414 km).

2


NOTE:

Check engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher through the first oil change interval. Running the engine with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe engine damage

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.


• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.


vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.



Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

(Continued)

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in

confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/

rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.


The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

2


Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.


The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.

• Always make sure that floor mats are properly

attached to the floor mat fasteners.

(Continued)



• Never place or install floor mats or other floor

coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.

• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top

of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always

properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning.

• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the

driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.

2

(Continued)



• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-

stalled, if not equipped from the factory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.

Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires

(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .103

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .110

▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .111

▫ Vanity Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of

Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF

EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

▫ Rear Cross Path — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .120

▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .126

▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .128

▫ Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment . . .128

3

98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . .129

▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .135

䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .138

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .138

▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .145

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .148

䡵 MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING

COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING

COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .159

▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .160

▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

▫ To Turn Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164

▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .166

3


▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .170

▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .171

▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .173


▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed

Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ Changing FCW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .189

▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .190

▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions. . . . . . . .191

䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .196

▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .197

▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .199

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .201

▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203


䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .204

▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .206


▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .206

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .208

䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

3


▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

▫ Console Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216


MIRRORS

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.

NOTE:

The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing.

The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned

On or Off through the touchscreen.

• Push the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the feature On.

• Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn the feature Off.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9-1-1 button.

3


WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.

• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or

3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network.

ASSIST Call

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.

Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.

• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile features.

• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle issues.

9-1-1 Call

1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.

NOTE:

In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the

9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the

Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the

Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.

2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.


3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator:

• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.

• The vehicle brand.

• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.

WARNING!



3


NOTE:


• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s

9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.

Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.

The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the

9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.

5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

WARNING!

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,

fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a

9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.

• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s

operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and

GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/ data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.

• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-

cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-

TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING

DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE

UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,

AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.

• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system

could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you.


9-1-1 Call System Limitations

Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1

Call system capabilities.

9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and

Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.

If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.

• The Device Screen will display the following message

“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

3


WARNING!

• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you

will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview

Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.

• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on

the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.

Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the

9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:

• Delayed accessories mode is active.

• The ignition is in the OFF position.

• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.

• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash.

• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.

• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global

Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.

• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.

• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.

• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.

• Weather.

• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

WARNING!



NOTE:


• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or

3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.



This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:


CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

3


Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.

NOTE:

The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards the front of the vehicle.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Folding Mirrors

Power Mirrors

The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side door trim panel.

Power Mirror Controls


The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that you want to adjust.

NOTE:

A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.

Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear

Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle” for further information.

3


Vanity Mirrors

A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward.

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors

An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.

Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun

Visor

To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.


3

Slide-On-Rod Extender


BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF

EQUIPPED

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.

Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational.

Automatic Transmission Vehicles

The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.

Manual Transmission Vehicles

The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the vehicle is stationary.


3

BSM Warning Light

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the


vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.

NOTE:

• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.

• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the

BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear.

The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.

Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.

Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.


Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

3

Side Monitoring

Rear Monitoring


Overtaking Traffic

If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph

(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Overtaking/Approaching

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.


The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes.

3

Stationary Objects

Overtaking/Passing


Opposing Traffic

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross Path — If Equipped

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

RCP Detection Zones

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately

3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.


NOTE:

In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.

3

WARNING!

RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.


Modes Of Operation

Three selectable modes of operation are available in the

Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Blind Spot Alert Lights Only

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced.

NOTE:

• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio volume is reduced.

• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request the appropriate visual alert only.

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.

Blind Spot Alert Off

When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.

NOTE:

The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.


This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada

Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.


1. The device may not cause harmful interference.


2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

3

(Continued)




vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.



Power Seats

The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are used to control the position of the seat.

Power Seat Switch

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.

Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.

Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.


Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support.

Power Lumbar Switch

3


WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat

belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.

Front Heated Seats — If Equipped

The front heated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.

• Press the heated seat button setting ON.

once to turn the HI

• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting ON.

• Press the heated seat button the heating elements OFF.

a third time to turn

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The

LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding



WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.

This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

3


Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped

Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,

HI and LO.

The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.

• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.

• Press the ventilated seat button choose LO.

a second time to

• Press the ventilated seat button turn the ventilated seat OFF.

a third time to

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.


On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding


Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment

The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.


WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.

Manual Front Seatback Recline

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Recline Lever

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

3


Passenger Seat Easy Entry

On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a normal seating position, first return the seatback to its original recline location and then slide the entire seat back to the pre-set lock position.

Easy Entry Lever

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.


Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats

The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with

Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the RHR.

The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately.

3

NOTE:

Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of your head.


To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.

To remove the head restraint, remove the seat belt from the seat belt loop. Raise the head restraint as far as it can go then push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes while pushing the adjustment button and release button. Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

3 — Seat Belt Loop

Head Restraint

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-

sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the

vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive

Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.


Folding Rear Seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in use.

3

Folding Rear Seatback Loop


Folded Rear Seat

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.

WARNING!

• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the

rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Two latches must be released to open the hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel.


2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, the safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood.

3

Hood Safety Catch Location

Hood Release Lever


3. Push the safety catch to the left.

Hood Safety Catch

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

LIGHTS

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, and interior lights.


3

Headlight Switch

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.


Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the

AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.

NOTE:

The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

NOTE:

The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Automatic High Beam — If Equipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE:

• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to


• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.

• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam

Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon ignition off.


If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp

Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.

To Activate

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.

2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.

NOTE:

This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).

3


To Deactivate

1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).

2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the system.

Headlight Time Delay

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.

To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off.

NOTE:

The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.

If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch

ON again, the system will cancel the delay.

If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE:

The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in


Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped

The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the engine is shut Off.

NOTE:

If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument


Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened.

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.


Multifunction Lever

3


Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Drivers

Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi

(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released.

NOTE:

If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams will shut off.

Map/Reading Lights

These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.

These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent.


3

Overhead Console

Interior Lights

The interior lights come on when a door is opened.

To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is


open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.

Dimmer Controls

The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel.

Dimmer Controls

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if equipped).


Interior Light Defeat (OFF)

Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom

“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open.

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)

Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID), and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.

3

Instrument Panel Dimmer

Dome Light Position

Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.


CAUTION!

Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

Mist Feature

Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever.

NOTE:

The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward

(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.

If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for


several wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles and then turn off.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.

3


Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO) position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

NOTE:

For vehicle equipped with rain sensor (auto wipes), please note that in addition to the 10 seconds, the headlights can also turn on if the Rain Sensing feature is

ON, and the front wipers complete a minimum of 5 wipe cycles within 60 seconds.

In this case (auto wipes) the headlights will turn off if no wipes occurs in 240 Seconds.

The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.

Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less

wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the

OFF position when not using the system.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.

• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions:

• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not


operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-

TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

NOTE:

Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the

Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

3


MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING

COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.

To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.


WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

— IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column.

Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch

To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired.

3


WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to

100 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen.

• Press the heated steering wheel button turn the heating element ON.

• Press the heated steering wheel button time to turn the heating element OFF.

once to a second

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.


On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.

• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.


The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

1 — ON/OFF

2 — SET+/ACCEL

3 — RESUME

4 — SET-/DECEL

5 — CANCEL

3


NOTE:

In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control

System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic

Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH

(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A

CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.

Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.


The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

3


• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.


The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):


• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.


• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.


To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE:

The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed

Control.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use

Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF

EQUIPPED

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.

Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.

Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.

3


ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.

NOTE:

• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,

ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.

• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.

The Cruise Control system has two control modes:

• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.

• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control

Mode” in this section.

NOTE:

The normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.

You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes function differently.

Always confirm which mode is selected.

WARNING!

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience

system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

• The ACC system:

• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,

and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).

• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-

tions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.

(Continued)



• Does not always fully recognize complex driving

conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.

You should switch off the ACC system:

• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,

heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).

• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when

driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.

• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.

• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a

constant speed.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation

The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system.

3


Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons

1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF

2 — SET+/ACCEL

3 — RESUME

4 — SET-/DECEL

5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE

6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF

7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE

8 — CANCEL

NOTE:

Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive

Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above

20 mph (32 km/h).

The system will cancel when the vehicle speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).

The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph

(32 km/h).

When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC

Ready.”

When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”


NOTE:

You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:

• When you apply the brakes.

• When the parking brake is set.

• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-

VERSE or NEUTRAL.

• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.

• When the brakes are overheated.

• When the ESC is in Full-off mode.

To Activate/Deactivate

Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays

“ACC Ready.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the DID will display

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

3


Adaptive Cruise Control Off

WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) want. You could lose control and have a collision.

Always leave the system off when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired ACC Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the

SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID will display the set speed.

If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above

20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:

• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the DID.

• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.

To Cancel

The following conditions cancel the system:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• The CANCEL button is pressed.

• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h).

• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.

• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the

Drive position.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.


• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.

• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:

• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control

ON/OFF button is pushed.

• The ignition is turned off.

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is pushed.

To Resume

If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.

3


WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.



While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pressing the SET + button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):


• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID.


• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID.


While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pressing the SET - button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):


• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.


• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID.


• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID.

NOTE:

• When you override and push the SET + button or SET

-

buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.

3


• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.

• The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph

(24 km/h) when following a target vehicle.

• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the

ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).

Setting The Following Distance In ACC

The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).

Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the DID.

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)


3

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)


Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setting — Increase button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar

(longer).

To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance

Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.

The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:

• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.

• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor.

• The distance setting is changed.


• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on

ACC Activation).

The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary.

NOTE:

The brake lights will illuminate whenever the

ACC system applies the brakes.

A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert

“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.

Brake Alert

NOTE:

The “Brake!” Screen in the DID is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously.

3


Overtake Aid

When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.

This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The

DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays depends on ACC system status.

Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/

OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the DID:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise

Control Ready.”

Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.

The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

• The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity

Display Warnings And Maintenance

“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”

Warning

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance.

This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/

FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the system will deactivate.


The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.

NOTE:

If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar

Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise

Control is still available. For additional information refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.

3


To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:

• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens.

• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.

• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.

• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.

Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.

When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive

Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.

NOTE:

• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar

Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.

• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit

ACC/FCW operation.

Service ACC/FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW

Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.


If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.

Precautions While Driving With ACC

In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.

Towing A Trailer

Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.

Offset Driving

ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.

Offset Driving Condition Example

Turns And Bends

When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once

3


the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.

NOTE:

On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.

Using ACC On Hills

When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.

Turn Or Bend Example

ACC Hill Example

Lane Changing

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,

ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.


3

Lane Changing Example


Narrow Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example


This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada

Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.


1. The device may not cause harmful interference.

2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.


Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control

Mode

In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal

(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)

Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To change between the different control modes, push the

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the

NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-

TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.

3


WARNING!

In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic

Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or

SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-

TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET.



When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed

Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the

SET + button.


The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of

U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:


• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID display.


• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID display.



When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.


The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:


• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID display.

3



• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the DID display.

To Cancel

The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed

Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the memory:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• The CANCEL button is pushed.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).

• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the

Drive position.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above

20 mph (32 km/h).

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:

• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control

ON/OFF button is pushed.

• The ignition is turned off.

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is pushed.


FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF

EQUIPPED

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings

(within the DID), to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.

NOTE:

FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller

(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.

When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings.

FCW Message

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.

3


NOTE:

• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph

(10 km/h).

• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality.

• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the

WARNING! (Continued) responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

Turning FCW ON Or OFF

NOTE:

The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.

The forward collision button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.

To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).

To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns off).

(Continued)

Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.

NOTE:

The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.

Changing FCW Status

The FCW Sensitivity Settings are programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in


The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting in the “On” setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.


Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.

NOTE:

• The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down.

• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.

• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens.

3


Service FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the DID displays:

• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required

• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required

This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF

EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.

during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System

Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in

REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately

6 mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense Warning Display

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if

Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System.

Refer to

⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your


The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the

Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to

“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding


ParkSense Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.


If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to continuous.

3


Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc


3

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:


Rear Distance

(in/cm)

Audible Alert

Chime

Greater than 79 in

(200 cm)

None

None

Single 1/2- Second

Tone

(for rear center only)

WARNING ALERTS

79-59 in

(200-150 cm)

59-47 in

(150-120 cm)

Slow


47-39 in

(120-100 cm)

Slow


None None None Arc — Left

Rear

Arc — Center

Rear

Arc — Right

Rear

Radio Volume

Reduced

None

None

No

6th Solid

None

Yes

5th Solid

None

Yes

4th Solid

None

Yes

39-25 in

(100-65 cm)

Fast


None

3rd

Flashing

None

Yes

25-12 in

(65-30 cm)

Fast

Less than

12 in

(30 cm)

Continuous

2nd

Flashing

2nd

Flashing

2nd

Flashing

Yes

1st Flashing

1st Flashing

1st Flashing

Yes


Enabling And Disabling ParkSense

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the

ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the

Uconnect display.

When the ParkSense system is disabled, the

Drivers Information Display (DID) will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Drivers Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be

OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed and the system is disabled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON.

ParkSense Switch

3


Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park

Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or

“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information

Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument


When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver

Information Display (DID) will display the

“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-

SORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID), make sure the outer surface and the inside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense System

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense or render the system temporarily unavailable.

• When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the instrument cluster will display

⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ for five seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the Driver Information Display (DID) will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.


• ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding an audio tone.

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.

Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ bumper.

• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within

12 inches 30 (cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the

“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the Driver Information

Display (DID).

3


CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to

recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using

ParkSense.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF

EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear

Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The

ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed

in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to

“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.

After five seconds this note will disappear.

NOTE:

The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into

⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position.


When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the last touchscreen appears again.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. The active guide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.

3


The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

Zone

Red

Yellow

Green

Distance to the rear of the vehicle

0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)

6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up.

Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be

used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be

driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.

NOTE:

If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener

(HomeLink) button and a power sunroof switch may also be included, if equipped.


3

Overhead Console

Courtesy/Reading Lights

At the forward end of the overhead console are two courtesy/reading lights.

Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time to turn off the light.


These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent.

Sunglasses Storage

At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.

The storage compartment access is a

⬙push/push⬙ design.

Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.

Push on the raised bar to close.

The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink channels.

The HomeLink indicator is located on the left side of the first button.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The

HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicle’s battery.

HomeLink Buttons

NOTE:

HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security

Alarm is active.

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.

For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.

To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes.


NOTE:

• Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.

• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

3


Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.

5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor.

Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-

ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE:

You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed.

6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed

HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.

NOTE:

If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.


Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Rolling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

3



3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.


(Non-Rolling Code)





3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.




3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button, while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.

4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light.

3


NOTE:

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.


(Canadian/Gate Operator)





3. Without

releasing the button

proceed with

“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Using HomeLink

To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.

• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.


• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com

for information or assistance.

3

WARNING!

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-

gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.

• Your motorized door or gate will open and close

while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.


This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry

Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with

FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device.

• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console.

Power Sunroof Switch

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the

Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the

ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown

from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.

Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

3


Opening Sunroof — Express

Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express

Open.” During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.

Closing Sunroof — Express

Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express

Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.

NOTE:

If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Push and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE:

The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.


Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the front windows closed, open the front windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.

3


Ignition Off Operation

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

NOTE:

Ignition Off time is programmable through the

Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer

Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.

The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a

“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.

Power outlets labeled with a “key” can be powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.

These power outlets can also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.

NOTE:

• The front integrated center stack power outlet can be changed from switched “ignition” to constant “battery” powered all the time by moving the integrated center stack fuse #12 in the Rear Power Distribution

Center from fuse location “IGN” to “B+.” Refer to

“Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”

• To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR cigar knob and element must be used.

The front power outlet is located next to the storage area on the integrated center stack of the instrument panel.


3

Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack Front Power Outlet — Center Console

NOTE:

All accessories connected to these powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.


Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated Center Stack

2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console

CAUTION!

• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13

Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet

should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

(Continued)


• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the

vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the

(Continued)


CAUTION! (Continued) battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage.

3


CUPHOLDERS

Front Cupholders

The front cupholders are located in the center console and in the door panels.

Front Cupholders

Door Cupholder

Rear Cupholders

The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.


3

Rear Cupholders


STORAGE

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel.

Glove Compartment

Opened Glove Compartment

Console Storage

The center console has a storage compartment located underneath the armrest. The compartment contains a 12

Volt power outlet, and a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various size coins). The center console may also be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).

UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and iPhone devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —

If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.


3

Center Console

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.


REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.

NOTE:

To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .220

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT . . . . . . . . . . .221

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT . . . . . . . . . . .224

䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .226

▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .239

▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .249

▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

▫ White Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .252

䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .253

▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255

▫ Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

▫ Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270

▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .270

▫ Customer Programmable

Features — Uconnect 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . .270

4

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Guidelines For Race Track Use Of Your SRT. . .286

▫ SRT Performance Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

▫ SRT Drive Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301

▫ Race Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312

▫ Valet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316

▫ ECO Mode — If Equipped With Automatic

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .319

䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .319

䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321

▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .322

▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .322

䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .331

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332

䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION

QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339

▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339

▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340

▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343

▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .345

▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346

▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346

▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350

▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .351

▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .352

▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353

▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

4


INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlets

2 — Instrument Cluster

3 — Glove Box

4 — Media Center

5 — Keyless Start/Stop Button

6 — Trunk Release Button

7 — Headlight Switch

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT


4

Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.4L


1. Tachometer

• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000).

2. Driver Information Display (DID) Display

• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Driver Information Display (DID) messages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

3. Speedometer

• Indicates vehicle speed.

4. Fuel Gauge

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the

ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.

5. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.


WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

4


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT

Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.2L Supercharged

1. Tachometer

• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000).

2. Driver Information Display (DID) Display

• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Driver Information Display (DID) messages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

3. Speedometer

• Indicates vehicle speed.


4. Fuel Gauge

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the

ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.

5. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

4


CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

IMPORTANT:

The warning / indicator light switches on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.

Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication.

All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.


Red Telltale Indicator Lights

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

4



Red Telltale

Light

What It Means


This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.


Brake Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-

Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

4


The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.


Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Vehicle Security Warning Light

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

4


Engine Temperature Warning Light

Red Warning

Light

What It Means

Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired, whichever come first.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.


Charging System Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Charging System Warning Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. This light illuminates when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDI-

ATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”

4


Oil Pressure Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

Oil Temperature Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.


Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/

RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

4


Transmission Temperature Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Transmission Temperature Warning Light

This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop them vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the

Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.


Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electric Power Steering Fail Warning

This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

4

Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Door Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.


Trunk Open Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Trunk Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.


Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic

System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.

4


CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.

Immediate service is required.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.


Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light

The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC

Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

4


Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.


Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

In any situation in which the message on the display is

⬙See manual⬙, it is ESSENTIAL to refer to the contents of the

⬙Wheels⬙ paragraph in the ⬙Technical data⬙ chapter, strictly complying with the indications that you find there.

IMPORTANT:

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated

4


on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.


CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.

4


Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.


Low Fuel Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Low Fuel Indicator Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.

Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light

This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

4


Forward Collision Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Forward Collision Indicator Light

This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light

What It Means

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light

This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.


Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Front Fog Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

4


Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Green Telltale Light

What It Means

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).

NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.


Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has been set.

4

Blue Telltale Indicator Light

High Beam Indicator Light

Blue Telltale

Light

What It Means

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.


White Telltale Indicator Light

Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light

White Telltale

Light

What It Means

Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.

DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)

The Driver Information Display (DID) features an interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster.

Driver Information Display (DID) Display

This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pushing the arrow


buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The

DID Menu Items consists of the following:

• Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Performance — If Equipped

• Driver Assist — If Equipped

• Fuel Economy

• Trip

• Audio

• Messages

• Screen Setup

• Diagnostics — If Equipped

4


The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

UP And DOWN Arrow Buttons:

Using the UP or DOWN arrows allows you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.

Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title area.

DID Controls

LEFT And RIGHT Arrow Buttons:

Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons allows you to cycle through the submenu items of the Main menu item.

NOTE:

• Holding the UP/DOWN or LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons will loop the user through the currently selected menu or options presented on the screen.

• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous scrolling.

• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.

OK Button:

For Digital Speedometer:

• Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h).

For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings:

• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.

• Within each submenu layer, the UP/DOWN arrows will allow the user to select the item of interest.

• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to the 1st page of the submenu).


• Pushing the LEFT arrow button will exit each submenu layer and return to the main menu.

For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Performance Timers):

• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK button.

Engine Oil Life Reset

Oil Change Required

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

4


Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the

OK

button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.

Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button and place the ignition to the

ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the

OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life

Screen In The DID And Holding OK

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following procedure(s):

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”

3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access the ”Oil Life” screen.

4. Push and hold the OK button to rest oil life. If conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a popup message of

⬙To reset oil life engine must be off with ignition in run

⬙ will be displayed (for 5 seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.

5. Push and release the DOWN or UP arrow button to exit the submenu screen.

NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.


Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If Equipped

The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle with automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The

PSI provides the driver with a visual indication within the DID display when the driver configured gear shift point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating.

This indication notifies the driver to change gear corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit. When the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the PSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.

The PSI indicator in the DID display remains illuminated until the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions return to a situation where changing gear is not required, corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit.

4


NOTE:

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information on enabling, disabling, and configuring the Performance Shift

Indicator.

Cruise Control

This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:

• Cruise Ready

This telltale will illuminate white to indicate that the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

• Electronic Speed Control SET

This telltale will illuminate green when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic

Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features

Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

DID Selectable Menu Items

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.

Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.

Speedometer

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Speedometer menu is displayed in the DID. Push and release the OK button to toggle units (km/h or mph) of the digital speedometer

Vehicle Info

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info menu is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow buttons to enter the submenu items of Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu items:

Tire Pressure Monitor

Coolant Temp

Trans Temp

Oil Temp

Oil Pressure

Oil Life

Battery Voltage

Intake Air Temp — If Equipped

Engine Torque — If Equipped

Engine Power — If Equipped

Air-Fuel Ratio — 6.2L Supercharged

Boost Pressure — 6.2L Supercharged

Intercooler Water Temp — 6.2L Supercharged


Performance Features — If Equipped

WARNING!

Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public roadways. It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “ Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for Main Menu/Sub-

Menu selectable items and navigation.

4


The Performance Features include the following:

• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer

– Best

– Last

– Current

– Reaction Timer

• 0-100 mph (0-161 km/h) Timer

– Best

– Last

– Current

– Reaction Timer

• 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer

– Best

– Last

– Current

– Reaction Timer

• 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer

– Best

– Last

– Current

– Reaction Timer

• Braking Distance

– Distance

– From Speed

• Current G-Forces

• Peak G-Forces

• Lap Timer

• Lap History

– Will list the last 5 lap with the best lap highlighted in green.

• Top Speed

The following describes each feature and its operation:

0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)

When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within

10 seconds.

• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at

0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.

• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph

(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.

• To clear the vehicle’s best, last, and current 0-60 mph

(0-100 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button for two seconds.


0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h)

When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) within 20 seconds.

• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at

0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.

• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to

100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) in less then 20 seconds.

• To clear the vehicle’s best, last and current 0 to

100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button for two seconds.

1/8 Mile (200 Meters)

When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within 15 seconds and the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.

4


• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph

(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.

• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile (200 meters) in less then 15 seconds.

• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run, push and hold the OK button for five seconds.

1/4 Mile (400 Meters)

When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within 25 seconds and the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (400 meters).

• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph

(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.

• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4 mile (400 meters) in less then 25 seconds.

• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/4 mile (400 meters) run, push and hold the OK button for two seconds.

Braking Distance

When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking distance, and the speed at which the brake pedal was pushed.

• This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.

• The word “READY” will display when conditions are met for the event to begin.

• The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place.

• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

• Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the current and last run values.

Current G-Force

When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force

(lateral and longitudinal) that displays the directions of the forces.

Peak G-Force

When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values (two lateral and two longitudinal).

• When a force greater than zero is measured, the display will update the value as it climbs. As the

G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.

• Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force values.


Lap Timer

When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer always at 0:00.00 with the previous Best and Last time data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).

• Pushing OK will start “current” timer from 0:00.0.

• When OK is pushed, the times are updated accordingly.

• As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the

“current” timer will stop and the time will be reset to

0:00.00.

• If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “current” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when ignition is placed in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON position (or will roll over at 59:59.99 if ever possible).

4


• Each time the driver pushes OK for a Lap that current time populates, the Last time and also populates the

1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button.

• The timer will stop when the driver navigates away from this page.

Lap History

When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and will color highlight the time that is the best time from the

Timer Page.

• Each time the driver pushes the OK button (while on the Lap Timer page) the current Lap Time populates the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.

• Color will indicate the time that is the best time from the Timer Page.

• Holding the OK button only resets the page you are on.

• Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.

Top Speed

When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since last reset:

• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every time that speed is exceeded that number is stored here unless/until the driver resets the screen.

• Latching over ignition cycles.

• Units will change with the global change in units.

Driver Assist — If Equipped

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status.

Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/

OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the DID:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise

Control Ready.”

Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.


The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

• Distance Setting Change

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

• The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.

For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle.”

4


Fuel Economy

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID.

• Two sub menu pages one with Current value displayed and one without the Current Value displayed:

– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)

– Range To Empty (miles or km)

– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)

– The Max and Min values will correspond to the particular engine requirements

• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.

• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.

Trip Info

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information will display the following:

• Distance

• Average Fuel Economy

• Elapsed Time

Hold the OK button to reset feature information.

Audio

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio Menu displays in the DID.

Stored Messages

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This

feature shows the number of stored warning messages.

Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.

Screen Setup

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and release the OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen

Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.

1. Upper Left

• Compass

• Outside Temp.

• Time

• Range to Empty (default)

• Average L/100km (or MPG)

• Current L/100km (or MPG)


• Trip A Distance

• Trip B Distance

• None

2. Upper Right

• Compass

• Outside Temp (default)

• Time

• Range to Empty



• Trip A Distance

• Trip B Distance

• None

3. Center

• Menu Title (default)

• Compass

4


• Outside Temp.

• Time

• Range to Empty



• Trip A Distance

• Trip B Distance

• Audio Inform

• Digital Speed

• None

4. Current Gear

• On

• Off (default)

5. Odometer

• Show (default)

• Hide

6. Fuel Gauge

• Standard (default)

• Detailed

7. Defaults

• Ok

• Cancel

Diagnostics — If Equipped

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the diagnostic Menu is selected. Then, the Driver is able to view engine and emission vehicle faults.

• Push OK to have the most recent fault code sent.

• There is a delay when the next diagnostic code is requested during which the following message is displayed:

• “Checking System for Diagnostic Codes.”


• Driver must push the OK button again to see the next

Pcode otherwise current message remains displayed.

• Driver exits when they cycle to another submenu (up or down).

• Faults are displayed from newest to the oldest.

• If the menu is exited before the end of codes is reached

- when the driver re-enters the list will be restarted from the beginning.

• When no codes are present or the last code is reached

= (P0000) and this message is displayed:

• “No Further or End of Diagnostic Codes.”

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Touchscreen And

Buttons On Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

4


Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and

Back buttons on the faceplate.

Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the

Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.

Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a

Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect display.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect

8.4 Settings

Press the “Apps ” button, then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety

& Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On

Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/

Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear

Personal Data and System Information.

NOTE:

• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.

• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings.

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Display Mode

When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings. To change Mode status, press and release the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen.


• Display Brightness With Headlights ON

When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

NOTE:

To make changes to the

⬙Display Brightness with

Headlights ON

⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the

⬙party⬙ or

⬙parade⬙ positions.

• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

NOTE:

To make changes to the

⬙Display Brightness with

Headlights OFF

⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the

⬙party⬙ or

⬙parade⬙ positions.

4


• Set Theme

When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. Changing the theme will modify the background image, highlight color, and button highlight of the display screen.

• Set Language

When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.

With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen

Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.

Units

After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below:

• Speed

Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”


• Distance

Select from: “mi” or “km.”

• Fuel Consumption

Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or

“km/L.”

• Pressure

Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”

• Temperature

Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”

• Power

Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”

• Torque

Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”

4


Voice

After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Voice Response Length

When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response

Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Show Command List

When in this display, you may change the Show Command

List settings. To change the Show Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.

Clock

After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped

This feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Set Time Hours

This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down.

• Set Time Minutes

This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The

“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down.

• Time Format

This feature will allow you to select the time format display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped

This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time

Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.


Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped

The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to

Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far” button. For further information, refer to “Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features

Of Your Vehicle”.

4


• Paddle Shifters — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable” button on the touchscreen.

• ParkSense — If Equipped

The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the

ParkSense status, press and release the “Sound Only” or

“Sound and Display” button. Refer to “ParkSense” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.

• Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped

The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the DID or Uconnect System. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol.” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.

ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.

• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature

Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.

When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind

Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot

Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the

Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or

“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.

NOTE:

If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.

• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear

Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.

The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen


display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection, press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.

• ParkView Backup Camera Delay

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of

“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds

8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into

“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the

4


“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving

Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the

“Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.

• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control

System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.

Lights

After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,

60 sec or 90 seconds.

• Headlight Illumination On Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.

• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.

The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.


• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High

Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.

4


• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or

NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.

• Sound Horn With Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the door locks are activated. To make your selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Sound Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

When

⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob

Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter

UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter

UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.

When

⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob

Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the

RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.


NOTE:

If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob

Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press

Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/ unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use

RKE transmitter).

• Passive Entry — If Equipped

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the

4


setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle”.

Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering

Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped

When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On

Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With

Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.

Engine Off Options

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.

To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),

DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the

Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”

button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes.”

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off

Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

• Balance/Fade

This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.


• Equalizer

This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

NOTE:

Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.

• Surround Sound — If Equipped

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.

To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

4


• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.

• Loudness — If Equipped

Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.”

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Paired Phones

This feature shows which phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.

• Paired Audio Sources

This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.

• Subscription Information

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free

services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE:

SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.

Restore Settings

After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their


default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking

⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or

“Cancel” to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating

⬙settings reset to default.⬙

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking

⬙Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to

Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating

⬙Personal data cleared”.

4


System Information

After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen the following information will be available:

• System Information

When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software version.

Guidelines For Race Track Use Of Your SRT

WARNING!

Always drive carefully within your capabilities.

Never drive in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

NOTE:

Due to the extreme conditions encountered during track use, any damage or wear associated with track use is not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.

If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes, they will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving situations. It is recommended that your vehicle operates in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track event.

Prior to each track event/day:

• Verify all fluids are at the correct levels. Refer to

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid levels & specifications.

• Verify the front and rear brake pads have more than ½ the original pad thickness remaining. If the brake pads require changing, please burnish prior to track outing at full pace. Refer to “Track Burnishing Your Brakes.”

At the conclusion of each track event, it is recommended that a brake bleed procedure be performed to maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your Brembo

High Performance brake system.

It is recommended that each track outing end with a minimum of one cool down lap using minimal braking.

Change the differential and manual transmission fluid after every five hours of track use. Refer to “Maintaining

Your Vehicle” for fluid levels & specifications.

If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille, it is recommended to remove it for track use during warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to critical powertrain and cooling system components.

All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of endurance, however, it is recommended that the suspension system, brake system, prop shaft, and half shaft boots should be inspected for wear or damage after every track event.


Track usage results in increased operating temperatures of the engine, transmission, clutch, driveline and brake system. This increased operating temperature may affect

Noise Vibration Harshness (NVH) countermeasures designed into your vehicle. New components may need to be installed to return the system to the original NVH performance.

Recommended tire pressure for track use:

• Challenger/Charger: 40 psi hot, 32 psi front, 30 psi rear cold

Track Burnishing Your Brakes

To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory installed components or when new brake friction components are installed:

4


1. Utilize one track session to burnish brakes by driving at 75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60 – 0.80g Max without ABS intervention.

2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling the brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then do a two lap cool down with minimal brake application. Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are, do another cool down lap.

3. Do not continue for more than one full burnishing lap after you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them smoking heavily. This will get them too hot and will negatively affect their life in future track use.

4. Allow the vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least 30 minutes. If an infrared thermal gun is available, allow the rotors to cool to 200° F (93.3° C) before going back out.

5. There should be a thin, ashy layer when inspecting the pads installed in the caliper. If the ash layer is more than ½ the thickness of the brake pad material, this is an indication of too aggressive of a burnish.

6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the brake pads start smelling in the next track session, reduce speed and braking deceleration to burnish targets and follow steps 2 through 4.

7. New brake pads installed on old rotors still need to be burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should be burnished at the track, or street driven for 300 city miles, to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on the rotor surface prior to track use.

8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be replaced. Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended, as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal

capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making it less robust and increasing the likelihood of pulsation in further track use.

SRT Performance Pages

Performance Pages is an application that provides a display for performance indicators, as received from the

Instrument Cluster, that will help you gain familiarity with the capabilities of your SRT vehicle in real-time.

To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the “SRT Performance” button on the touchscreen, or press “SRT Pages” in the top left of the touchscreen while in Drive Modes.

Press the desired button on the touchscreen to access that specific Performance Page.


WARNING!

Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public roadways. It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

4


The Performance Pages include the following:

• Home

• Timers

• Gauges 1

• Gauges 2

• G-Force

• Engine

The following describes each feature and its operation:

Home

SRT Performance Pages — Home

When Home is selected, the following features will be available:

• A series of six images which can be selected by the user.

• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll through vehicle images.

• A short-cut to the SRT Drive Modes feature.

Timers


When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to select from following “Tickets”:

• Current

Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time” summary of the performance timers.

• Last

Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run of performance timers.

• Best

Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run of performance timers, except for braking data.

4

SRT Performance Pages — Timers


• Save

Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.

Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run for Uconnect System storage. The operation of the Save feature is listed below:

SRT Performance Pages — “Save”

• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB” button to save runs to the jump drive.

• With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save runs to the SD Card.

• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the

Owner web page.

• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer

“Ticket.”

The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:

• Reaction Time

Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing light (behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in the Driver Information Display (DID).

NOTE:

The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛, and ¼ Mile timers will be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h).

• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)

Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to

60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).

• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)

Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to

100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).

• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)

Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ mile

(200 meters).

• ¼ Mile (400 meter)

Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile

(400 meters).


• Brake Distance

Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full stop. Contains current and last data for distance and start

– from speed.

NOTE:

The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

• Brake Speed

Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the brake pedal is depressed.

NOTE:

Brake Distance and Speed timers will only display

⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30

MPH (48 km/h).

4


Gauges 1

SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.2L Manual

Transmission)

SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.2L Automatic

Transmission)


When selected, this screen displays the following values:

• Coolant Temperature

Shows the actual coolant temperature.

• Oil Pressure

Shows the actual oil pressure.

• Oil Temperature

Shows the actual oil temperature.

• Battery Voltage

Shows the actual battery voltage.

• Trans Oil Temp (Auto Transmission Only)

Shows the actual automatic transmission oil temperature.

SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.4L)


• Coolant Temperature

Shows the actual coolant temperature.

• Oil Temperature

Shows the actual oil temperature.

4


• Oil Pressure


Gauges 2

SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.4L Manual

Transmission)

SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.4L Automatic

Transmission)


• Battery Voltage

Shows the actual battery voltage.

• Intake Air Temperature

Shows the actual intake air temperature.

• Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission

Only)

Shows the actual transmission temperature.



• Boost Pressure

Shows the current value for boost pressure.

• Air Fuel Ratio

Shows the current value for the air fuel ratio.

• Inter-Cooler (I/C) Coolant Temperature

Shows the current value for the I/C coolant temperature.

• Intake Air Temperature

Shows the actual intake air temperature.

4

SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.2L)


G-Force

SRT Performance Pages — G-Force

When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as steering angle.

When G-Force is selected, the following features will be available:

• Lateral G-Force Left and Right

The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right force of the vehicle.

• Longitudinal G-Force Fore and Aft

The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and braking force of the vehicle.

• Peak G-Forces Fore Aft, Left and Right

This shows the maximum g-forces that have been achieved since the last reset from the DID. Peak values are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until they are cleared by the driver.


• Vehicle Speed

Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle in either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum value.

• Steering Wheel Angle

Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.

The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.

When a force greater than zero is measured, the display will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.

Engine

SRT Performance Pages — Engine (6.4L Automatic

Transmission)

4


SRT Performance Pages — Engine (6.2L Automatic

Transmission)


• Vehicle Speed

Shows the actual vehicle speed.

• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts

Shows the instantaneous horsepower.

• Instantaneous Torque

Shows the instantaneous torque.

• Oil Pressure (6.4L Only)


• Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)

Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the vehicle.

• Boost Pressure (6.2L Only)

Shows the actual boost pressure.

SRT Drive Modes

Key FOB 6.2L Supercharged Engine — If Equipped


RED key FOB unlocks the full potential of the engine’s output, and allows the driver to select from two power levels within Drive Modes Set-Up.

4

Red Key FOB

If your vehicle is equipped with the 6.2L supercharged engine, it will support an additional engine power level configuration as part of SRT Drive Modes. Use of the

Black Key FOB

Use of the BLACK key FOB limits the driver to a reduced engine output. This information is also available within


the SRT Drive Modes interface, and can be accessed by pressing the “KEY FOB” button on the touchscreen in the

SRT Drive Modes menu.

Drive Modes

Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes feature which allows for coordinating the operation of various vehicle systems depending upon the type of driving behavior desired. The Drive Modes feature is controlled through the Uconnect radio and may be accessed by performing any of the following:

• Pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank.

• Selecting “Drive Modes” from the “Apps” menu.

• Selecting “Drive Modes” from within the Performance

Pages menu.

NOTE:

Not all options listed in this manual are available on every vehicle. Refer to the chart below for all available

Drive Mode vehicle configurations.

Drive Modes


Engine/

Transmission

6.2L Auto

6.2L Manual

6.4L Auto

6.4L Manual

Red Key/

700+ HP

X

X

N/A

N/A

Black

Key/500

HP

X

X

N/A

N/A

Transmission

The SRT Drive Modes main screen displays the current drive mode and real-time status of the vehicle’s performance configuration. The selectable Drive Modes buttons are Track, Sport, Custom, or Default and will be highlighted when displaying the current configuration. Information shown below each drive mode button will indicate the actual status of each system, along with a graphic that displays the status of the vehicle’s components. The color red indicates “Track,” orange “Sport,” and yellow

“Street.” If the system status shown does not match the

X

N/A

X

N/A

NOTE:

Paddle

Shifters

X

N/A

X

N/A

X

X

X

X

N/A

N/A

X

X

X

X

X

X

ESC Full-Off can be activated across all of the

Drive Mode features by pushing and holding the ESC Off button on the instrument panel switch bank for five seconds.

Suspension

Steering Traction

current drive mode set up, a message will be displayed indicating which values are not matching the current mode and why.

4


Listed below are the available Drive Modes:

Track Mode

Sport Mode

Drive Modes (Track)

Pressing the “Track” button on the touchscreen will activate the configuration for typical track driving. The

Transmission, Traction, Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their “Track” settings highlighted in red. The

Paddle Shifters are enabled.

Drive Modes (Sport)

Pressing the “Sport” button on the touchscreen will activate the configuration for typical enthusiast driving.

The Traction, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their “Sport” settings highlighted in orange. The Paddle Shifters are enabled.

Default Mode


Suspension can be configured in either the “Street,”

“Sport,” or “Track” modes and the Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled while in this mode.

Custom Mode

4

Drive Modes (Default)

The vehicle will start in Default Mode unless Valet or

ECO mode (if equipped) is active. This mode is for typical driving conditions where the Traction and Transmission will be operating in their Street settings, which cannot be changed while in this mode. The Steering and

Custom Mode

The Custom Mode may be selected quickly by pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank two


times, or pressing the “Custom” button on the touchscreen. Custom Mode allows the you to create a custom configuration that is saved for quick selection of your favorite settings. While in Custom Mode, the Power,

Traction, Transmission, Steering, Suspension, and Paddle

Shifter settings are shown in their current configuration.

While in the Custom Drive Mode screen, press the

“Custom Set-Up” button on the touchscreen to access the selectable options. In the Custom Mode Set-Up screen the individual current configuration will be displayed. Select which mode suits your driving needs for a custom driving experience.

Custom Mode Set-Up Info

Within the Custom Mode Set-Up screen, press the “info” button on the touchscreen then use the left / right arrows to scroll through all the available Drive Mode systems giving you a description of their operation and current configuration.

Custom Mode Set-Up — 6.2L Example

Power — If Equipped With 6.2L Supercharged Engine


NOTE:

This selection is only available with the RED

RKE Key Fob.

• 500

Press the “500” button on the touchscreen to modify the output power of the engine to 500.

NOTE:

This selection is available with the RED or

BLACK RKE Key Fob.

4

• 700+

Power — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only

Press the “700+” button on the touchscreen to modify the output power of the engine to 700+.


Transmission — If Equipped With 8 Speed

Transmission

• Sport

Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide faster shift speeds and will have a moderate comfort trade-off.

• Street

Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a balance of shift speed and comfort for typical daily driving.

Transmission

• Track

Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide the fastest shift speeds and will have the highest comfort trade-off.

Paddle Shifters

Paddle Shifters

• ON

Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable steering wheel paddle shifters.


• OFF

Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable steering wheel paddle shifters.

Traction

4

Traction


• Track

Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to modify traction control to optimize track performance with the least stability control.

• Sport

Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to turn off traction control and reduce stability control.

• Street

Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide full traction control and full stability control.

Suspension

Suspension

• Track

Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide the firmest possible suspension stiffness with the highest amount of comfort trade-off.

• Sport

Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide a firmer suspension stiffness with moderate comfort tradeoff.

• Street

Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a balance of suspension stiffness and ride comfort for typical daily driving.


Steering — If Equipped With 6.4L Engine

4

Steering

• Track

Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to adjust the steering effort to the highest level.


• Sport

Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to adjust the steering effort to the higher level.

• Street

Press the “Street

⬙ button on the touchscreen to adjust the steering effort to the lowest level.

Race Options

Race Options

Press the “Race Options” button on the touchscreen while in the Drive Modes screen, to display the vehicle’s

Launch Control screen. Within Race Options, you can activate, deactivate, and adjust the RPM values for the

Launch Control and Shift Light features.


Launch Control

WARNING!

Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. It is recommended that this feature be used in a controlled environment, and within the limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

Activate Launch Control

Launch Control can be accessed by pushing the Launch

Control button on the instrument panel switch bank or pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank then selecting the “Race Options” button on the touchscreen. Press the “Activate Launch Control” button on the touchscreen to activate the feature. Press the

4


“Launch RPM Set-Up” to set the holding RPM. Launch

Mode can be turned on or off by either pushing the

Launch Control button on the instrument panel switch bank (if activated), or by pressing the “Cancel Launch

Mode” button on the touchscreen.

NOTE:

Launch RPM Set-Up cannot be accessed unless

Launch Mode is deactivated.

Launch RPM Set-Up — Manual Transmission

To adjust the Launch RPM, drag the slider bar or press the arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding RPM.

The launch RPM limits will vary between the automatic transmissions (1500–3500 RPM) and manual transmissions (2000–4500 RPM).

For further information refer to “Drive Modes” in “Starting and Operating”.

Shift Light


the Driver Information Display (DID). Pressing the “Shift

Light RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen will take you to the Shift Light RPM Set-Up screen.

4

Shift Light

To actuate the Shift Light feature, press the “Shift Light” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Shift Light

On” button on the touchscreen. Activation is shown on

Shift Light RPM Set-Up

The Shift Light RPM Set-Up allows you to set the shift light to actuate for gears 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5-8 (automatic transmission) 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5–6 (manual transmission).


Pressing and releasing the up/down arrow buttons on the touchscreen above and below each listed gear, the

RPM values will change in increments of 250 RPM.

Pressing and holding the arrows will change the RPM values in increments of 500 RPM, ranging from 2000–

6000 RPM. The Shift Light setup screen may only be accessed if the feature is enabled, press the “Reset to factory default” button on the touchscreen to change back to factory settings, or press the “Shift Light Off” button on the touchscreen to turn the system off completely.

Valet Mode

Valet Mode Activation

To enter Valet Mode press the “Valet” button on the touchscreen and a popup screen will ask you if you would like to enter Valet Mode, after selecting “Yes” you will be asked to enter a 4 digit PIN code. The PIN code is


not set, so you are free to select any 4 digit numeric combination that will be easy to remember.

While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configurations are set and locked to prevent unauthorized modification:

• Engine limited to the lowest power output state.

• Transmission locks out access to first gear and upshifts earlier than normal.

• Traction, Steering, and Suspension are set to their

STREET settings.

• Steering wheel paddle shifters are disabled.

• The Drive Mode interface is not available. Pressing the

SRT button on the touchscreen will display the unlock keypad.

• The ESC Off button is disabled.

• The Launch Control button is disabled.

Valet Mode Deactivation

To exit Valet Mode you must enter the same 4 digit PIN that was used to enter the mode. The unlock keypad can be accessed by either pushing the SRT button on the faceplate, or pressing the “Valet Mode Active – Press

Here to Exit” button on the touchscreen.

4


The Valet Mode Deactivation key pad will then prompt you for your 4 digit PIN code, enter your PIN code and press the “OK” button on the touchscreen. Your vehicle will return to the default state after a key cycle.

NOTE:

If your 4 digit PIN is lost or forgotten, the vehicle will exit Valet Mode after a battery disconnect for approximately one minute. Reconnect the battery and cycle the ignition to the RUN position, the vehicle will be in

Default Mode.

Valet Mode Deactivation PIN

ECO Mode — If Equipped With Automatic

Transmission


performance. Increased engine exhaust noise and/or vibration may be noticed while Eco is active. This is normal and a result of the increased amount of operating conditions where the vehicle is allowed to operate in four cylinder shutoff mode (6.4L Only).

The Paddle Shifters will be disabled while in Eco mode.

• Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco.

• Eco will be disabled when another Drive Mode is selected or “Eco” button is pressed.

4

Eco Mode

Press the “Eco” button on the touchscreen on the SRT

Drive Modes main menu. Eco mode modifies the vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide improved fuel economy at a trade-off with acceleration

UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED

For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.

iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port.


Located in the front storage area of the center console, this feature allows an iPod/MP3 player, or an external

USB device, to be connected to the audio system.

iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit

Apple’s website for software updates.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect User’s

Manual.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.

1 — Aux Jack

2 — USB Port

USB/AUX/SD Card Ports

3 — SD Card Slot

Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.


Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/AUX etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode.

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.

4


Media Mode

Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the selected media (AUX, Bluetooth, SD Card).

Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.

If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES

Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile device operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).

Regulatory And Safety Information

USA/CANADA

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.

Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy

emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).




Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie

Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout


brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

NOTE:

• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

4


• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for help.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display.

When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,

Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display.

General Overview

Buttons On The Faceplate

The buttons on the faceplate are located below the

Uconnect screen.

Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The

Faceplate

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect system screen.

Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons

On The Touchscreen

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The

Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing


this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

2. A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.

4. AUTO Operation Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic

Operation” for more information.

4


5. Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change the current airflow setting to

Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.

6. Rear Defrost Button

Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).

An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect

8.4 Only)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer

temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings.

NOTE:

Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.

8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button

(Uconnect 8.4 Radio Only)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings.

NOTE:

Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.

9. SYNC

Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the

Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated


when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.

10. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows:

Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.

The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

4


Button On The Touchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.

Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

11. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

• Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

• Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:

BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

• Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions.

12. Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control

ON/OFF.

13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect

8.4 Only)

Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings.

NOTE:

In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.

14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4

Only)

Provides the driver with independent temperature control.

Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature


settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings.

NOTE:

In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.

Climate Control Functions

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.

4


NOTE:

• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,

Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.

• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

Recirculation

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the

Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.

NOTE:

In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual

Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.

Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the

“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.


2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the temperature. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.

The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.

4


• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the Uconnect customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System Settings” in this section of the manual.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override

The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation.

NOTE:

Each of these features operates independently from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, temperature control will continue to operate automatically.

Operating Tips

NOTE:

Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.

A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material

Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.

Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your

Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

Winter Operation

Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.


Vacation Storage

Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service

(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Window Fogging

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The

Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.

4


NOTE:

• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods, as fogging may occur.

• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.

When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

A/C Air Filter

The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.

Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions


4


UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

Introducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or

8.4A/8.4AN system.

Key Features:

• 5” touchscreen

• Three buttons on either side of the display

Uconnect 8.4AN

If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a

Uconnect 8.4A system.


Get Started

All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and

feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.

2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice

Command from current category.

Uconnect Voice Command

1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text

2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For

8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate

Functions.

3 — Push To End Call

4


Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button . After the beep, say ѧ

• Cancel to stop a current voice session

• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands

• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN


Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM

Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say ѧ

• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM

• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

TIP:

At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote

CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)

4


Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.

• Change source to Bluetooth

• Change source to AUX

• Change source to USB

• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play

song

Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical

TIP:

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice

Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check

UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.


Push the Phone button the following commands ѧ

. After the beep, say one of

• Call John Smith

• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts

• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)

• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)

TIP:

When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name

exactly

as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say

“Call

John Smith work.”

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)

4


1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After the beep, say: “Reply.”

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.

TIP:

Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit

UconnectPhone.com.

Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes.

Stuck in traffic.

See you later.

No.

Okay.

Start without me.

Where are you?

I’ll be late.

I will be

<number> minutes late.

Call me.

I’ll call you later.

Are you there yet?

I need directions.

I’m on my way.

Can’t talk right

I’m lost.

now.

See you in

<number> of minutes.

Thanks.

iPhone Notification Setting

1 — Select “Settings”

2 — Select “Bluetooth”

3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle

4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”


TIP:

Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.

Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees

• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees

TIP:

Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice

Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.

4


Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate

Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)

The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.)

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the beep, say:

• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”

• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address

800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”

2. Then follow the system prompts.

TIP:

To start a POI search, push the VR button . After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”


Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)

WARNING!



4

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation

NOTE:

Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access, press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page.


NOTE:

Uconnect Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States,

Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.

9-1-1 Call

Security Alarm Notification

Remote Door Lock/Unlock

Stolen Vehicle Assistance

Remote Vehicle Start**

Remote Horn and Lights

Yelp Search

Voice Texting

Roadside Assistance Call

WiFi Hotspot***

**If vehicle is equipped.

***Extra charges apply.

Vehicle Health Alert

Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner

Connect website (moparownerconnect.com).

Register (8.4A/8.4AN)

To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.

1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.

2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.

3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details.


Signing up is easy!

Simply follow the steps above. Or, press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen to

“Register By Web” to complete the process using your smartphone or computer.

For further information please visit www.driveuconnect.com

Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)

You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.

4


Mobile App

To link your internet radio accounts:

1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile device.

2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app.

3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.

4. Enter your login information for the selected app and press Link.

5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth, pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream your personalized music.

NOTE:

• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up

Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).

• Once you download the app to your compatible mobile device, you will also be able to start your vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.

Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)

1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-

sage

to John Smith.”

2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process your message.

3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”


You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message. For details about

MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.

Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:

4

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL iPhone Notification Setting

1 — Select “Settings”

2 — Select “Bluetooth”

3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle

4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”

TIP:

• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.

• Messages are limited to 140 characters.

• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the feature.

Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)

Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you.

1. Press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen.

2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.


3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen, push the VR button , then say: “YELP search.”

4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell

Uconnect the place or business that you’d like

Uconnect to find.

TIP:

Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or

Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.

Yelp

SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)

Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?

SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN

system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)

4


Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• Show fuel prices

• Show 5 - day weather forecast

• Show extended weather

TIP:

Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.

SiriusXM Travel Link

Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set reminders, and more. For further information go to the

Mopar Owner Connect website (moparownerconnect.com).

Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do

Not Disturb.

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:

• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”

• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.

NOTE:

Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the touchscreen while typing a custom message.


While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.

NOTE:

• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.

• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.


This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry

Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:


2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

4


NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with

FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device.

• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

Additional Information

© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and

Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner

Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,

Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.

Uconnect System Support:

• U.S. residents call 877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com

• Canadian residents call 800-465-2001 (English) or

800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca

Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET

Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET

Sun., Closed

Uconnect Access Services Support 855-792-4241 Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped. . . . . . . .360

▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .360

▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362

▫ Extreme Cold Weather

(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .367

䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .367

▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .367

▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

▫ 1–4 Skip Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .372

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .374

5

356 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

䡵 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

▫ Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or

Console Mounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

䡵 DRIVE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

▫ Launch Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .389

▫ Guidelines For Track Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393

䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .396

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398

䡵 POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE . . . . . . . . .399

䡵 POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED

ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400

䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped. . . . . . . .402

▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped. . . . . .403

䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405

䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .405

▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .406

▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .406

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .406

▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .408

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .412

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .412

▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .418

▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418

▫ Rainy Brake Support (RBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .423

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .424

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .426

䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .431

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431

STARTING AND OPERATING 357

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434

▫ All Season Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .435

▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435

▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .440

䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .440

▫ Tire Rotation — Same Tire Size On Front And

Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441

5


▫ Tire Rotation — Different Tire Size On Front

And Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441

䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .442

▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445


䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448

▫ 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . .448

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .450

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .452

䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .455

䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455

▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455

▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .456

▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .456

▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456

▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457

䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457

䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .458

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key

Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)




access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

5


Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-

TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle.

This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.

Normal Starting With Integrated Key — Manual

Transmission

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds, place the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to

15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump-Starting” in “What

To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL

into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.

• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to

a complete stop.

• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle

has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly on the brake pedal.

Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)

NOTE:

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.


Do not

press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated

Key to briefly place the ignition in the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, place the ignition in the LOCK/

OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the

“Normal Starting” procedure.

Keyless Enter-N-Go

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the ENGINE START/

STOP button is installed and the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go Key

Fob is in the passenger compartment.

5


Normal Starting

Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —

Automatic Transmission Only

1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the

ENGINE START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again.

NOTE:


Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —

Manual Transmission Only

1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing and holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. Release the button when the engine starts. If the vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds, release the button, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal

Starting” procedure.

3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, release the button.

NOTE:


To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE

START/STOP Button — Automatic Transmission

Only

1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.

3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/

STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row and vehicle speed must be above

5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped, placed PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the Driver Information Display (DID) will display a “VEHICLE NOT IN PARK” message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.


NOTE:

If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN

(engine not running) position and the transmission is in

PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the

OFF position.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE

START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission

Only

1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in

NEUTRAL, then push and release the ENGINE

START/STOP button.

2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.

3. Place the shift lever in first gear or REVERSE and then apply the parking brake.

5


NOTE:

• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.

• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and the engine is not running.

• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the

ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped, placed in park and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position.

Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — With Driver’s

Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK

Or NEUTRAL Position)

The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and RUN.

To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:

1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position,

2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position,

3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into

the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury.

(Continued)



• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster

cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

5


Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE

START/STOP Button) — Automatic Transmission

Only

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather

⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold the brake pedal, press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it, then push and release the

ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE

START/STOP Button) — Manual Transmission

Only

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather

⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold the clutch pedal, press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it, then push and hold the

ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15 seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal

Starting” procedure.


After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is located near the air box.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

Six-Speed Manual Transmission

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.

5


CAUTION!

• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch

pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic

Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor

may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in damage to the clutch and transmission.

• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while

driving, as this may result in transmission synchronizer damage.

• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear

wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage to the transmission may occur.

NOTE:

During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal.

Manual Shifter

NOTE:

• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than

3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop, you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position for Keyless Enter-N-Go) as compared to the LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go). This is normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor system.


• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain, you may hear your transmission. This can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.

Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.

Shifting

Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal when shifting.

5


The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second or downshifting from sixth to fifth.

The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first to fourth or from sixth to third gear.

CAUTION!

Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so may result in transmission damage.

You must always use first gear (or REVERSE) when starting from a standing position.

Recommended Shift Speeds

To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart.


Engine

6.2L Supercharged

6.4L

Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.

Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired acceleration rate.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS

mph

(km/h)

1-4

20

(32)

4-5

25

(40) mph

(km/h)

20

(32)

37

(59)

5-6

42

(67)

48

(77)

(41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is in first gear, and the accelerator is at ¼ throttle or less.

After you shift the transmission to fourth gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear.

1–4 Skip Shift

There are times when you must shift the transmission directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F

Downshifting

To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downshift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade.

5


WARNING!

Skipping more than one gear while downshifting, could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You could have a collision.

CAUTION!

• If you skip more than one gear while downshifting

or downshift at too high an engine speed, you could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.

• Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is

moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could damage the engine and/or clutch.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle when the ignition is in the OFF mode, the automatic transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.


ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.


access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

(Continued)




in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after

the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

5


NOTE:

You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.

The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from

NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.

Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If

Equipped

The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display

(DID).

To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of

PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or RE-

VERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

Automatic Transmission Shifter

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).


Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.

Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position

(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.

5


NOTE:

If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,

REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL

(AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE:

After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position of an automatic

transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.

Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

(Continued)


• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others

if it is not in PARK (automatic transmission).

Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.

Make sure the automatic transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift an automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, turn the engine OFF, apply the parking brake, and remove the ignition key. If equipped with Keyless

Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode. When the ignition is in the

LOCK or OFF (key removal) mode, an automatic transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key

fob and lock your vehicle.


access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

5

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must

start the engine and also press the brake pedal.

Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.

(Continued)


• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.


REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The

DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds),

5


use the AutoStick shift control (refer to

⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for further information) to select a lower gear.

Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

MANUAL (M)

The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual control of transmission shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to

“AutoStick” in this section for further information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.

Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps.

NOTE:

In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF.

4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.


NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

AUTOSTICK

Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or

Console Mounted Shifter

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.

5


This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, and many other situations.

Operation

When the shift lever is in the DRIVE (D) position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the shift lever into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the

DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a highlighted

⬙M⬙ (Manual) indication. When the shift lever is in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the shift lever forward

(-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel) to downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, (or tap the lever rearward (+) or tap the (+) shift paddle), to command an upshift.

1 — (–) Shift Paddle

Paddle Shifters

2 — (+) Shift Paddle

NOTE:

Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), while the shift lever is in DRIVE, will activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster, but the

⬙M⬙ will not be highlighted. The transmission will revert back to normal operation (if the shift lever remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal activity.

In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver

(using the shift lever, or the shift paddles), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.


• In temporary AutoStick mode (shift lever in DRIVE), the transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation.

• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (shift lever in

MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be maintained until the shift lever is returned to DRIVE, or as described below. The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.

• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.

5


• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.

• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.

Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.

• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.

• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.

• Holding the (-) paddle depressed, or holding the shift lever in the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when

AutoStick is engaged.

• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected.

To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the

DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if the shift lever is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.


DRIVE MODES

Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive Mode feature. This feature gives the driver control over the systems in the vehicle which affect its performance, enabling the driver to tune it for desired driving scenarios. Below are the modes of operation:

NOTE:

Refer to “Drive Modes” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further descriptions of these modes.

Drive Modes

• TRACK MODE — This mode is a predefined configuration optimized for typical track driving. The ABS,

Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their TRACK settings. Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are enabled.

5


• SPORT MODE — This mode is a predefined configuration optimized for typical enthusiast driving. The

ABS, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their SPORT settings. Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are enabled.

• CUSTOM MODE — This mode allows the driver to create a custom vehicle configuration that is saved for quick selection of favorite settings. The system will return to Default mode when the ignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this mode is selected. While in Custom Mode the Traction, Transmission, Steering, Suspension and Paddle shifter settings may be configured through the custom mode set-up in any combination.

Custom Mode Set-Up

Listed below is a description of each of these settings:

Transmission (Trans)

• Track — provides the fastest shift speeds and has the highest comfort trade-off.

• Sport — provides a faster shift speed and has a moderate comfort trade-off.

• Street — provides a balance of shift speed and comfort for typical daily driving.

Paddles — If Equipped

• On — enables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters.

• Off — disables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters.

Traction

• Track — modifies traction control to optimize track performance with the least stability control.

• Sport — turns off traction control and reduces stability control.

• Street — provides full traction control and full stability control.


Suspension (Susp)

• Track — provides the firmest possible suspension stiffness with the highest amount of comfort trade-off.

• Sport — provides a firmer suspension stiffness with moderate comfort trade-off.

• Street — provides a balance of suspension stiffness and ride comfort for typical daily driving.

Steering — 6.4L Engine Only

• Track — provides the greatest amount of steering feedback, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.

• Sport — provides greater steering feedback, requiring greater steering effort.

• Street — provides a balance of steering feedback and steering effort.

5


Engine Power — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only

• 700+ HP — Provides engine output power to 700+ horsepower.

NOTE:

This selection is only available with the RED RKE

Key Fob “700+ HP”.

• 500 HP — Provides engine output power to 500 horsepower.

NOTE:

This selection is available with the RED or

BLACK RKE Key Fob “500 HP”.

• DEFAULT MODE — This mode will be activated automatically when restarting the vehicle unless Valet mode or ECO mode (if equipped) is active. This mode is for typical driving conditions where the ABS and

Transmission will be operating in their STREET settings, which cannot be changed while in this mode.

The Steering (electric power steering — if equipped) assist and Suspension (active dampening system) stiffness may be configured to either the STREET, SPORT or TRACK settings within this mode. Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters may be enabled or disabled while in this mode as well.

• VALET MODE — To enter this mode the operator must select it from the Drive Modes interface and enter a four digit PIN code. The PIN code is not predetermined, so the operator is free to select any four digit numeric combination that will be easy to remember.

While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configurations are set and locked to prevent unauthorized modification:

• Engine limited to a lowest power output state.

• Transmission locks out access to first gear and shifts earlier than normal.

• Traction, Steering and Suspension are forced to

STREET settings.

• Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are disabled.

• The SRT Drive Modes are not available. Pushing the

SRT button will display the unlock keypad.

• The ESC Off button is disabled.

• The Launch Control button is disabled.

NOTE:

• To exit VALET Mode the operator must enter the same four digit PIN that was used to enter the mode. The unlock keypad can be accessed by either pushing the

SRT button or selecting to disable Valet on the

Uconnect touchscreen.

• The vehicle will restart with VALET active if VALET was active when the vehicle was last shut down.


• Eco (Automatic Transmission only) — Eco modifies the vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide improved fuel economy at a trade-off with acceleration performance. Increased engine exhaust noise and/or vibration may be noticed while Eco is active, this is normal and will not damage the vehicle.

NOTE:

Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco.

Launch Mode — If Equipped

This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a form of traction control that manages tire slip while launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use during race events on a closed course where consistent quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this

5


feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems control resulting in an aborted launch.

NOTE:

Launch mode is not available within the first 500 miles of engine break-in.

Preconditions:

• Launch control should not be used on public roads.

Always check track conditions and the surrounding area.

• Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles of the vehicle’s life.

• Launch Control should only be used when the engine and transmission are at operating temperature.

• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle components and is not recommended.


Launch Control is only available when the following procedure is followed:

1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch bank.

NOTE:

Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or pressing the “Apps” button on the touchscreen are two other options to access launch control features. Please refer to “Drive Modes” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust your launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.

3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen.

4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.

5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.

6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in

“Drive”.

7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM

Set-up” screen.

NOTE:

Messages will appear in the Driver Information

Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the above conditions have not been met.

8. When conditions 4 through 7 have been met, the

Driver Information Display (DID) will read “Launch

Ready Release Brake”.


9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.

Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches

62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the ESC system will return to its current ESC mode.

Launch control will abort before launch completion, display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any the following conditions:

• The accelerator pedal is released during launch.

• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer moving in a straight line.

• The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the system to another mode.

NOTE:

After launch control has been aborted, ESC will return to its current ESC mode.

5



Vehicles with a manual transmission have an adjustable launch RPM controlled through the Uconnect system.

Launch Control is only available when the following procedure is followed:

1. Pushing the “LAUNCH” button on the center stack switch bank.

NOTE:

Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or pressing the “Apps” button on the touchscreen are two other options to access launch control features. Please refer to “Uconnect Settings” within your Owner’s

Manual on the DVD for further information.

2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust your launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.

3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen.

4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.

5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.

6. Fully depress the clutch pedal and make sure the vehicle is in first gear.

7. While holding the clutch depressed, rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will hold at the pre-selected launch RPM. The engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the

“Launch RPM Set-up” screen.

NOTE:

Messages will appear in the Driver Information

Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the above conditions have not been met.

8. When conditions 4 through 7 have been met, the

Driver Information Display (DID) will read “Launch

Ready Release Clutch”. Release the clutch quickly and

continue to hold wide open throttle to launch execute shifts. Refer to “Manual Transmission – Shifting” in this section for further information.

Release the clutch and continue to hold wide open throttle to launch.

9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.

Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches

62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the ESC system will return to its current ESC mode.

Launch control will abort before launch completion, display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster and return to

ESC Full ON under any the following conditions:

• The brake is applied during launch.

• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer moving in a straight line.


• The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change the ESC system to another mode.

NOTE:

After launch control has been aborted, ESC will return to its current ESC mode.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the transmission may occur.

Guidelines For Track Use

NOTE:

Because of the extreme conditions encountered during track use, any damage or wear associated with track use is not covered by warranty.

• If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes they will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving

5


situations. It is recommended that your vehicle operates in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track event.

• Prior to each track event/day, verify all fluids are at the correct levels. Refer to “Fluid Capacities” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

• Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear brake pads have more than ½ pad thickness remaining. If the brake pads require changing, please burnish prior to track outing at full pace.

• At the conclusion of each track event, it is recommended that a brake bleed procedure is performed to maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your

Brembo High Performance brake system.

• It is recommended that each track outing should end with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal braking.

• If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille, it is recommended to remove it for track use during warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to critical powertrain and cooling system components.

• All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of endurance, however, it is recommended that suspension system, brake system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft boots should be checked for wear or damage after every track event.

• Track usage results in increased operating temperatures of the engine, transmission, clutch – if equipped, driveline and brake system. This may affect noise

(NVH) countermeasures designed into your vehicle.

New components may need to be installed to return the system to the original NVH performance.

• Tire pressure:

• 40psi (276kpa) hot, recommend 32psi (221kpa) front,

30psi (207 kpa) rear cold

NOTE:

It is recommended that you target 40psi (276kpa)

Hot Tire Pressure at the conclusion of each track session.

Starting at 32psi (221kpa) Front & 30psi (207 kpa) Rear

Cold and adjusting based on ambient & track conditions is recommended. Tire pressure can be monitored via the

Driver Information Display (DID) and can assist with adjustments.

Track burnishing your brakes:

To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory installed components or when new brake friction components are installed:

1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving at

75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60-0.80g max without ABS intervention.

2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling the brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then


do a two lap cool down with minimal brake applies.

Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are, do another cool down lap.

3. Do not continue for more than 1 full burnishing lap after you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them smoking heavily. This will get them too hot and affect their life negatively in future track use.

4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least

30 min. If an infrared thermal gun is available, allow rotors to cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before going back out.

5. There should be a thin, ash layer when inspecting the pads installed in the caliper. Having the ash layer go more than half the thickness of the pad material indicates too aggressive of a burnish.

5


6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the pads start smelling in the next track session, reduce speed and braking decel to burnish targets and follow step 2-4.

7. New pads installed on old rotors still need to be burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should be burnished at the track or street driven for 300 city miles to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on the rotor surface prior to track use.

8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be replaced. Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended, as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making it less robust and increasing the likelihood of pulsation in further track use.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.

Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction

(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:

• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy.

• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.

• Keep tires properly inflated.

• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.


Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip

Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Due to lower ground clearance, driving your ve-

hicle up steep driveways, approach ramps or near parking blocks may cause damage to the front fascia and ground effects.

• Driving through snow more than 4 inches (100 mm)

deep may cause damage to the front fascia and ground effects.

5


Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).

Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so.

WARNING!

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph

(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.

• Failure to follow these warnings may result in

injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

CAUTION!

• Always check the depth of the standing water

before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

• Determine the condition of the road or the path

that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water.

• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving

through standing water. This will minimize wave effects.

• Driving through standing water may cause damage

to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to

(Continued)


CAUTION! (Continued) operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can

cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

5

POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE

The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.


Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to the “Drive

Modes” in this section for further information.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

NOTE:

• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.

Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.

If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SER-

VICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER

STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Driver

Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your


POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED

ENGINE

The hydraulic power steering system is sport tuned and will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.


If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.

• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.

This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.

Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED

This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required.

5


NOTE:

This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the

PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.

When the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless

Enter-N-Go), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.

• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.


The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.


Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release


The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.

Automatic Transmission Parking Brake

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position of an automatic

transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.

Always apply the parking brake fully when parked

(Continued)

5


WARNING! (Continued) to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key

Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.


access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.


in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with


(Continued)



• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the automatic transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake Warning Light”.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine

OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating.


NOTE:

Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance braking system. The brake pads are a semimetallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applications) this is considered normal conditions.

5

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic

Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist

(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability

Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.


Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert

Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

This function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.

Brake System Warning Light

The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the

ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.

ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).

You also may experience the following when ABS activates:

• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop).

• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.

• Brake pedal pulsations.

• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-

ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference

(Continued)


WARNING! (Continued) can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish

their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-

ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

5

(Continued)



• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake

System Warning Light” is not on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake

Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not

“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure

unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases


the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.

The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• The feature must be enabled.

• The vehicle must be stopped.

• Park brake must be off.

• Driver door must be closed.

• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction

(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

5


• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission if the clutch is pressed HSA will remain active.

WARNING! (Continued) driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.

Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.

Towing With HSA

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist

(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.

Your complete attention is always required while

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your

trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.

• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the

parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.

Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a

collision or serious personal injury.

Disabling And Enabling HSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information

Display (DID), refer to “Driver Information Display

(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.


• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to


For vehicles not equipped with the DID, perform the following steps:

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward).

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Start the engine.

5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half turn to the left.

6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two times.

5


7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.

9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.


WARNING!

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent

the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

5

(Continued)



• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-

tain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect

ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the

ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

ESC Operating Modes

NOTE:

Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.

ESC On

This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.

Partial Off

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.

To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the

“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push

the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off.

WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality

of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.

When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.

• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the

ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.


NOTE:

• For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to return to ESC On.

• ⬙ESC Sport⬙ and ⬙ESC Track⬙ (if equipped) are ESC partial off mode(s).

Full Off – If Equipped

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the

5


“ESC OFF” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.

NOTE:

System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.

When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.

ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if equipped.

WARNING!

• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque

reduction and stability features are disabled.

Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.

• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle

stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full

Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road use.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and

ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a

malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.


NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.

5


Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.

NOTE:

ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

Ready Alert Braking (RAB)

Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations.

It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.

Rainy Brake Support (RBS)

Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake

Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.


TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

5

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

2 — Size Designation

3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load

5 — Maximum Pressure

6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades


NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter

⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.


Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P

= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT

= Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

T or S

= Temporary spare tire or

31

= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145

= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80

= Aspect ratio in percent (%)

– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5

= Section width in inches (in)

R

= Construction code

–

⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or

–

⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18

= Rim diameter in inches (in)

5


EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95

= Load Index

– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H

= Speed Symbol

– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

• LL = Light load tire or

• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load

– Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure

– Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire


Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT

= Department of Transportation

– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA

= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9

= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD

= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03

= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 03 means the 3rd week

5


EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

01

= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 01 means the year 2001

– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term

B-Pillar

Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Definition

The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of

PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Term

Maximum Inflation

Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire

Inflation Pressure

Tire Placard


Definition

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

5


Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)


Tire And Loading Information Placard

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

5


4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting

And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if

“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs

(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =

650 lbs [295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.


NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).

5



WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause collisions.

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result

in overheating and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-

hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-

lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

(Continued)

5



• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle

to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.

The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.


Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

5


loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire

(sidewall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,

Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or


on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use

Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

5

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.


Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a

“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph

(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.


WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

Tire Tread

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is

5


worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

• Distance driven.

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and

Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for more information relating to the Load

Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.


WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have a collision.

5

(Continued)



• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are not recommended.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.


Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Remember, more frequent rotation is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation.

Tire Rotation — Same Tire Size On Front And

Rear Axle

The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in the following diagram.

Tire Rotation

Tire Rotation — Different Tire Size On Front And

Rear Axle

The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” as shown in the following diagram. This method is required due to different size tires on the front and rear of the vehicle.

5


Tire Rotation

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the

“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F

(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire


pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM

Telltale Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the

“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the

“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may

(Continued)

5


CAUTION! (Continued) cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,

always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light”.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.


Premium System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module,

• Four TPM sensors,

• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver

Information Display (DID), and

• TPM Telltale Light

TPMS Display

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the Drivers Information Display (DID) will display a “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic

5


showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values shown in a different color. An

⬙Inflate

Tire to XX

⬙ message will also be displayed in the DID.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition

(those shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the

⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message.

Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the DID will return the pressure values shown to their original color, and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Service TPMS Warning

If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the

DID will display a

⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer flash, and the

⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.

2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.

3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

Vehicles With Compact Spare

1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.

Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the

“TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display the low pressure values in a different color and the

⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message.


3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the DID will display a

⬙SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM

⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID will display a

⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the

“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the

5


low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to

20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the

TPMS to receive this information.


This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:


FUEL REQUIREMENTS

6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine

These engine are designed to meet all emissions regulations, provide optimal fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “Premium” gasoline having a posted octane number of

91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required in these engines.

While operating on gasoline with the required octane number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.


Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

5


Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.


Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:

• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal

law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.

(Continued)

5



• The use of fuel additives, which are now being

sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

(Continued)



• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-

tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.

If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

Fuel Fill Cap

NOTE:

When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.

5


CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control

system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap.

• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities

into the fuel system.

• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the

vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled.

(Continued)


• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is

running.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.

NOTE:

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.

This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

“Check Gascap” message will display in the Driver

Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic

System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.


VEHICLE LOADING

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.

Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

Vehicle Certification Label

Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.

The label contains the following information:

• Name of manufacturer

• Month and year of manufacture

• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front

5


• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Type of Vehicle

• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the

GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Overloading

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s

GVWR.

Loading

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.

Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

NOTE:

Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed and GAWRs.


to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR

TRAILER TOWING

Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.

5


RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition

Flat Tow

Dolly Tow

On Trailer

Wheels OFF The

Ground

None

Front

Rear

All

Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission

NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

NOT RECOMMENDED NOT RECOMMENDED

OK OK


Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is

NOT ALLOWED

. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.

Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is

NOT ALLOWED

, as severe transmission damage will occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may occur.



Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is

NOT ALLOWED

. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.

Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is

NOT ALLOWED

, as severe transmission damage will occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may occur.

5

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!



WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .462

䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .462

䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463

▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464

䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .465

▫ Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465

▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466

▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .466

▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .467

▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . .470

䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .476

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478

䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED

TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481

䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .485

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486

▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487

6

462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F

(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–

230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F

(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.

6


Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque

111 Ft-Lbs (150 N·m)

**Lug Nut/

Bolt Size

M14 x 1.50

Lug Nut/

Bolt Socket

Size

22 mm

**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Wheel Mounting Surface

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.


WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

Torque Patterns

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Tire Service Kit

Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire

Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).

6


Tire Service Kit Storage

The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.

Tire Service Kit Components And Operation

Tire Service Kit Location

Tire Service Kit Components

1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob

2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

3 — Pressure Gauge

4 — Power Button

7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)

8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire

Service Kit)

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses

Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.

Selecting Air Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.

Selecting Sealant Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position to inject the Tire

Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)

(6) when selecting this mode.


Using The Power Button

Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire

Service Kit.

Using The Deflation Button

Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions

• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and

Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to

“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)

“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.

6


Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location

• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.

• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.

• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire

Service Kit.

• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air

Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob

(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit

Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.

• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the

vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle

under the following circumstances:

– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately

1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

– If the tire has any sidewall damage.

– If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure.

– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.

– If the wheel has any damage.

– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel.

(Continued)



• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or

heat source.

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service

Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.

Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.

6

(Continued)



• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In

case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.

Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit

(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s

Hazard Warning flashers.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.

This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake.

(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the

Sealant Mode position.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire.

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem.

5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

NOTE:

Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire.

(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The

Deflated Tire:

• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire

Service Kit.

NOTE:

Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.

• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the

Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.


NOTE:

Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.

If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service

Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.

Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.

Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant

Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power

Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit.

3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance.

6


NOTE:

If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air

Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the

Sealant Hose (6):

1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant

Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.

2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).

If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

NOTE:

If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service

Kit.

2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the

Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel.

3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D)

“Drive Vehicle.”


(D) Drive Vehicle:

Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.

Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).

CAUTION!

• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get

hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.

• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end

of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal

Tire Service Kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.

Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

6


(E) After Driving:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air

Mode position.

2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.

4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure

Gauge (3).

If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:

1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door opening.

NOTE:

If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12

Volt outlet.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle.

4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center.

5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been repaired.

6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.

NOTE:

When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.

(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).

2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle.


3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant

Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly.

4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing.

5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).

7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.

6


JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.

It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.

Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump-starting.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

Remote Battery Posts Locations

1 — Remote Positive (+) Post

2 — Remote Negative (-) Post


WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-

ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch

bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your

skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

6


3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.


2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation,

(Continued)

6


CAUTION! (Continued) the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, press and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE

(with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE:

For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage

DRIVE or REVERSE.

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

NOTE:

Press the

⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system in

⬙Partial Off⬙ mode before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake

Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the

⬙ESC

Off

⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-

tween DRIVE / 1ST GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast

may lead to transmission overheating and failure.

It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).


WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED

TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating the Manual Park

(Continued)

6



Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.

In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.

Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual

Park Release lever.

Console Storage Bin

3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether strap up through the opening in the console base.

4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it to the right.


5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position.

The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.

Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.

6

Locking Tab

Tether Strap


To Reset The Manual Park Release:

1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side) rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.

2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever.

3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed position.

4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.

Reinstall the console storage bin.


TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.

Towing Condition

Flat Tow

Wheels OFF The Ground

NONE

Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow

Flatbed

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to

Front

Rear

ALL

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION/

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

If transmission is operable:

• Transmission in NEUTRAL

• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed

• 30 miles (48 km) max distance

NOT ALLOWED

NOT RECOMMENDED

BEST METHOD

main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.

6


If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.

Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not

attach to front or rear suspension components.

Damage to your vehicle may occur from improper towing.

• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this

vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.

Automatic Transmission

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to

⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine is off.

• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).

• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck.

CAUTION!



If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.

Manual Transmission

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.


If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.

• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).

• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

If the transmission is not operable, then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck.

6

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L

SUPERCHARGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L

(392 HEMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493

䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .494

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494

䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495

䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496

䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497

䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .497

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .505

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512

7

490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519

▫ Clutch Hydraulic System

(Manual Transmission) — If Equipped. . . . . . .521

▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .521

▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .521

▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524

䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530

▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .531

▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .536

䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542

䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542

䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544

▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,

Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen

Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544

▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High

Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545

▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .546

▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546

▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546

▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .546

▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546

䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547

▫ Fluid Capacities — 6.2L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547

▫ Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . .548

䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND

GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549

▫ Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551

7


ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED

1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)

2 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)

3 — Intercooler Fluid Reservoir

4 — Engine Oil Fill

5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap

6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover

7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

8 — Air Cleaner Filter

9 — Power Steering Reservoir

10 — Engine Oil Dipstick

11 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

12— Washer Fluid Reservoir


ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI)

1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)

2 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)

3 — Engine Oil Dipstick

4 — Engine Oil Fill

5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap

7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

8 — Air Cleaner Filter

9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

7


ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability.

The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a

“Check Gascap” message will display in the Driver

Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the Trip Odometer button to

turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently


serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

7


3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should

not

proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.


MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed

“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-

form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.

(Continued)

7



• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning.

Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.

regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (.95

liters) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the

“SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the

“SAFE” range on these engines.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.


NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the

American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.

The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra

0W-40 engine or equivalent MOPAR oil meeting the FCA

US Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Engine Oil Viscosity

Use Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 engine or equivalent MOPAR oil meeting the FCA US Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

7


Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Engine Oil Change Requirements — 6.2L

Supercharged Engine (If Equipped)

We recommend having your oil changed and vehicle serviced by your authorized dealer. You should only perform maintenance procedures and or repairs for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.

Your 6.2L Supercharged engine (if equipped) has a unique engine oil system. The system contains a drain in the engine oil pan and the engine oil cooler. It is necessary for the service technician to drain both the engine oil pan and the engine oil cooler to properly perform the engine oil change procedure. Failure to drain the engine oil cooler will result in overfilling your vehicle’s engine oil system.

NOTE:

Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result.


To access these oil drains, the vehicle needs to be safely lifted and supported to remove the front underbody shields (belly pan). Your service technician will refer to the Service Manual for proper under body shield (belly pan) removal and installation procedures.

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

7


Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Maintenance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.


Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

NOTE:

The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting

Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

Battery Location

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can

burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean

(Continued)

7


WARNING! (Continued) over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that

should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive

(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the

vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.

Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information.

(Continued)



• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

7


Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If

Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf

— If Equipped

HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

A/C Air Filter

The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.

1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips.


Access Door

2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.

Filter Access Cover

3. Remove the used filter.

4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).

7


A/C Air Filter

5. Close the filter access cover.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.

Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock

Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.


Adding Washer Fluid

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

7


The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the Driver’s Information Display (DID).

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.

complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.

Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.

Replace as required.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the

WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing

CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

(Continued)


• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park

over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-

leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.

• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

(Continued)



In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.

Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

7


In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

NOTE:

Your vehicles exhaust system may be equipped with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may be illuminated.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-

nect the fan motor lead or place the ignition in the

LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-

Go). The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position

(RUN position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).

(Continued)


• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.


Check the coolant recovery bottle and/or the supercharger coolant recovery bottle (if equipped with the 6.2L

Supercharged engine) tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-

MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE

COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

7


Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE:

Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to

MS.90032).

NOTE:

If equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine the intercooler must be vacuum flushed and filled. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.


Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

(Continued)


OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000


miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic

Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10

Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F

(−37°C) are anticipated.

7


• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

NOTE:

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact your local authorized dealer.

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If

HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

Cooling System Pressure Caps

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant

(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

NOTE:

Be sure you do not mix the engine coolant system pressure cap with the intercooler system pressure cap these caps are not interchangeable.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add

engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based


engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

7


When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE:

When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to

MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY

the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically.


WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.


Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.

Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system.

Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

7


Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate

the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.

Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission)

— If Equipped

The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining

Your Vehicle” for further information.


Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4 inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid,


if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your

Vehicle” for further information.

Change Transmission Fluid

If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.



Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the

7


transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic

Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the


The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools.

If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.


Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

Rear Axle


Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level ground and has been stationary for 15 minutes will improve the accuracy of the fluid level reading.

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle. The fluid level should be 1-2.5 mm below the fill plug. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Change Axle Fluid


7


Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR

Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials

such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274

kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.


Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

7


• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.

• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use

MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or

Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY

MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.

Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If

Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose

Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.


Interior Care

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

7


WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

CAUTION!

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.

CAUTION!

Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.


1. Clean with a wet soft cloth or micro-fiber towel. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

7


WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders

Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console.

NOTE:

The cupholder cannot be removed.

FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-

priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition

is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-

rized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air

bag system, braking system), power unit systems

(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.


CAUTION!

• When installing the power distribution center

cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use

only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

7

Front Power Distribution Center


Cavity

1

2

3

Cartridge Fuse

–

40 Amp Green

50 Amp Red

7

8

9

10

4

5

6

11

12

13

30 Amp Pink

40 Amp Green

30 Amp Pink

20 Amp Blue

20 Amp Blue

–

–

–

–

–

Mini-Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

–

Description

Fuse – Spare

Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)

Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) – If Equipped

Starter

Electronic Stability Control

Electronic Stability Control

Police Ignition Run / ACC #1

Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2

All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped

Security – If Equipped / Under hood Lamp –

Police

Horns

Air Conditioning Clutch

Fuse – Spare

Cavity

14

15

16

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

28

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

50 Amp Red

50 Amp Red

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

20 Amp Blue – Police

40 Amp Green / 20

Amp Blue – Police

20 Amp Blue

20 Amp Blue

–

Mini-Fuse

–

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–


Description

Fuse – Spare

Left HID – If Equipped

Right HID – If Equipped

Radiator Fan #2 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)

Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped / Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged)

Wiper Motor

Headlamp Washers – If Equipped

Police Bat Feed #2

Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) /

Police Bat Feed # 3

Police Bat Feed # 1

Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3

Fuse – Spare

7


Cavity

29

Cartridge Fuse

–

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

38 –

Mini-Fuse

15 Amp Blue

–

25 Amp Clear

–

–

25 Amp Clear

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

Description

Transmission Control Module (LA/LD Police) /

Electronic Shift Module (LA)

Fuse – Spare

Engine Module

Fuse – Spare

Fuse – Spare

Powertrain #1

Powertrain #2

Anti-Lock Brake Module

Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays (LD/LX) /

Electric Power Steering Module (LD/LX) / Fuel

Pump Relay (LD/LX) / 5–Speed

Airbag Module

Cavity

39

48

49

50

51

52

53

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Mini-Fuse

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

–

–

20 Amp Yellow

5 Amp Tan

–


Description

EPS (LA) / EHPS (Police)/AC Clutch Relay /

Vacuum Pump Relay / Fuel Pump Relay (LA)

/ Rad Fan Relays (LA)

AWD Module (LD/LX) / Front Axle Disconnect

(LD/LX) / Adaptive Cruise (LA) – If Equipped

Fuse – Spare

Fuse – Spare

Vacuum Pump

Adaptive Cruise (LD/LX) – If Equipped

Fuse – Spare

7


Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays.

CAUTION!

• When installing the power distribution center

cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use

only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

Rear Power Distribution Center

8

9

10

11

12

6

7

Cavity

2

3

4

5

15

16

Cartridge Fuse

60 Amp Yellow

–

60 Amp Yellow

30 Amp Pink

20 Amp Blue – Police

40 Amp Green

40 Amp Green

30 Amp Pink

40 Amp Green

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

–

40 Amp Green

20 Amp Blue

Mini-Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

20 Amp Yellow

–

–


Description

Front PDC Feed #1

Fuse – Spare

Front PDC Feed #2

Sunroof

Dome Lamp – Police

Exterior Lighting #1

Exterior Lighting #2

Interior Lighting

Power Locks

Driver Door Control Module

Passenger Door Control Module

Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter IP –

If Equipped

HVAC Blower

Left Spot Lamp – Police

7

27

31

32

23

24

25

26


Cavity

17

18

19

20

21

22

Cartridge Fuse

–

30 Amp Pink

–

–

30 Amp Pink

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Mini-Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

20 Amp Yellow – Police

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

15 Amp Blue –

LD/LX

25 Amp Clear

25 Amp Breaker

15 Amp Blue

Description

Fuse – Spare

Mod Network Interface – Police

Fuse – Spare

Fuse – Spare

Fuel Pump

Right Spot Lamp – Police

Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port

Integrated Center Stack

Tire Pressure Monitor

Cygnus Transmission Module (LD/LX)

Amplifier – If Equipped

Power Seats – If Equipped

HVAC Module/Cluster

Cavity

33

34

35

36

37

38

40

41

42

43

44

45

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

30 Amp Pink

–

–

–

Mini-Fuse

15 Amp Blue

10 Amp Red

5 Amp Tan

15 Amp Blue

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

–

–

–

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

15 Amp Blue


Description

Ignition Switch/RF Hub Module/Steering Column Lock (LX) – If Equipped

Steering Column Module/Clock (LX)

Battery Sensor

Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped

Radio

Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/Console Media Hub

Fuse – Spare

Fuse – Spare

Rear Defrost

Comfort Seat And Steering Wheel Module

(Heated Steering Wheel/RR Heated Seats)

Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera

Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass(LD/LX) /

Humidity Sensor

7


Cavity

46

47

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

53

54

55

56

57

58

48

49

50

51

52

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Mini-Fuse

–

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

–

–

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

–

–

–

–

10 Amp Red

Description

Fuse – Spare

Adaptive Front Lighting / Auto High BEAM /

Day Time Running Lamps – If Equipped

Active Suspension – SRT

Fuse – Spare

Fuse – Spare

Front Heated Seats – If Equipped

Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches –

If Equipped

HVAC Module/In Car Temperature Sensor

Fuse – Spare

Fuse – Spare

Fuse – Spare

Fuse – Spare

Airbag Module

Cavity

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Mini-Fuse

20 Amp Yellow

5 Amp Tan

–

–

–

25 Amp Breaker

10 Amp Red

–

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

–

–


Description

Adjustable Pedals – Police

Heated Washer Nozzles (LD)

Fuse – Spare

Fuse – Spare

Fuse – Spare

Rear Windows (LD/LX)

Airbag Module

Fuse – Spare

Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / Inside RR

View Mirror / Power Outlet Illumination (Center

Console) / Police Run Acc Relay

Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A Sense (LD/LX)

Rear Sunshade (LD/LX)

Fuse – Spare

Fuse – Spare

7


VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your battery.

• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will

Interior Bulbs

ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.

Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps

Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp

Overhead Console Reading Lamps

Visor Vanity Lamps

Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped

Bulb Number

W5W

562

578

A6220

194


Door Courtesy

Shift Indicator Lamp

Bulb Number

562

JKLE14140

Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.

Exterior Bulbs

Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID)

Halogen Headlamp

Front Park/Turn Lamp

Front Fog Lamp

Front Side Marker

Tail Lamp

Stop/Turn Lamp

Rear Side Marker

Bulb Number

D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) *

HIR2LL

LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

H11LL





7


Backup Lamp

Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

License

* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE:

Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.

Bulb Number




Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,

Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen

Headlamps — If Equipped

To replace the passenger side lamps:

1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the headlamp cover.

3. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.

NOTE:

The park/turn lamps can also be accessed at this point.

4. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to remove.

5. Remove bulb by turning it counter clockwise and disconnect.

6. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.

7. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise and then reinstall headlamp cover.

To replace the driver side lamps:

1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the air cleaner filter cover by removing three fasteners and loosening the clean air inlet clamp and then rotate cover off to the side.

NOTE:

The cover has an electrical connector that does not need to be disconnected if the cover is rotated off to the side.

3. Remove one fastener on the lower air box to remove and access the rear of the headlamp assembly.

4. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.

5. Remove the headlamp cover.


6. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to remove.

7. Remove bulb by turn it counter clockwise and disconnect.

8. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.

9. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise and then reinstall headlamp cover.

10. Reinstall engine air cleaner assembly.

Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and

Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity

Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped

HID Headlamps

The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.

High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of

this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb

7

546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of

HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned

ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.

NOTE:

On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.

Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp

The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.

Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp

The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The Tail/Turn and Stop

Lamps must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.

Center Tail/Backup Lamp

The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The Center Tail/Backup Lamp must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.

License Lamp

The License Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.


FLUID CAPACITIES

Fluid Capacities — 6.2L

U.S.

Fuel (Approximate)

91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol

Engine Oil With Filter

SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified

18.5 Gallons

6 Quarts

Cooling System *

Engine: MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent

15 Quarts

Intercooler: MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent

4.5 Quarts

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

Metric

70 Liters

5.68 Liters

14.4 Liters

4.2 Liters

7


Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.4L

U.S.

Fuel (Approximate)

91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons

Engine Oil With Filter

SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified

Cooling System *

MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to

MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent

7 Quarts

15 Quarts

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

Metric

70 Liters

6.6 Liters

14.4 Liters

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Important Information

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

(Continued)



OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

7


Engine

Component

Engine/Intercooler Coolant

Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter

Spark Plugs

Fuel Selection

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000

Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032.

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils.

The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent MOPAR engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.

MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.

We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.

91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.


Chassis

Component

Manual Transmission – If

Equipped

Automatic Transmission – If

Equipped

Hydraulic Power Steering Reservoir – If Equipped

Brake Master Cylinder

Rear Axle

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.

We recommend you use MOPAR Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-

10838.

We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If

DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

We recommend you use MOPAR LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE

75W85 (API GL-5).

7

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .554

▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556

8

554 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles

(805 km).

NOTE:

• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.

• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.

• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument


At Each Stop For Fuel

• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance

Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.

Once A Month

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 555

• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals as required.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power steering, and add as needed.

• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.

8


Maintenance Chart

Miles:

Or

Months:

Or Kilometers:

6

Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

X

12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X


Miles:

Or

Months:

Or Kilometers:

6

Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before scheduled maintenance.

X

12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

8


Miles:

Or

Months:

Or Kilometers:

Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and boot seals, for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

X X X X X X X X X X X X


Miles:

Or

Months:

Or Kilometers:

If using your vehicle for any of the following: dusty or off-road conditions.

Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

X X X X X X X X X X X X

8


Miles:

Or

Months:

Or Kilometers:

Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

Inspect the CV joints.

Inspect the exhaust system.

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X


Miles:

Or

Months:

Or Kilometers:

Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.

Inspect the manual transmission fluid

(If

Equipped).

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X

8


Miles:

Or

Months:

Or Kilometers:

Inspect the rear axle fluid.

Change the manual transmission fluid

(if equipped).

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

X X

X

X X X

X

X X X

X


Miles:

Or

Months:

Or Kilometers:

Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.

Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

8


Miles:

Or

Months:

Or Kilometers:

Replace the air conditioning filter.

Inspect and replace the

PCV Valve if necessary

Replace the spark plugs –

6.2L Supercharged

Engine **

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

X X X X X

X

X X

X

X X X

X

X X


Miles:

Or

Months:

Or Kilometers:

Replace the spark plugs –

6.4L Engine **

Flush and replace the engine coolant at

120 months if not done at 150,000 miles

(240,000 km).

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150

X

X X

8


** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-

hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .569

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .569

䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569

▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .570

▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .570

▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or

Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .571

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571

䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .572

䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573

䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .573

▫ In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573

▫ In Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573

9

568 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .574

䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575

▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575

▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 569

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

9


facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.

They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA US LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (800) 423-6343

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.


Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan

Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer

Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)

465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

9


The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the

DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR PARTS

MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy


campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West

Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/

9


PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE:

A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.


Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

9


WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX

10

578 INDEX

About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402, 405

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .157

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .515

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

Adjust

Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124, 128

Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124, 128

Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56

Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 57

Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56

If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 94, 228

Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .502

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505

Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334, 506

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .332, 335

Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505, 506

Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331, 505

Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

Alarm

Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 231

Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . .514, 547, 548

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406

Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524

Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 33

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . .324, 331

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374, 521, 523

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523, 549, 551

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523

INDEX 579

Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551

Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522

Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .380

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551

Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 503

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25

Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408

Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405

10

580 INDEX

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551

Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 519

Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519, 549, 551

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 405

Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

Braking Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542, 544

Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 542

Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

Capacities, Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548

Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 452

Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455

Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546

Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .495

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Child Restraints

Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .84

Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .83

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .78

Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .74

Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324

Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Console Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

INDEX 581

Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .516

Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515

Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513, 517

Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517

Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517

Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518

Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516

Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516

Selection Of Coolant

(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 547, 548, 549, 550

Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524

Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251, 252

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212, 530

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569

10

582 INDEX

Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .145

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497

Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494

Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Dipsticks

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498

Disabled Vehicle Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 486, 487

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517

Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

Door Locks

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 30

Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Driver Information Display

DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 258

Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 258

Driving

Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing

Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405

Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406

Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418

Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412

Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .531

Electronic Speed Control

(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 154, 157

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .235

Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Emergency, In Case Of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 478

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 486, 487

Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .495

Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492, 493

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502

Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

INDEX 583

Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498

Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493

Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513, 549, 550

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 452

Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 478

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498, 547, 548, 549, 550

Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499

Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502

Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 547, 548

Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499

10

584 INDEX

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 452

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 510

Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334, 506

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 549, 550

Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501

Flashers

Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 142, 250

Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548

Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498

Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .549

Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448, 549, 550

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550

Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548

Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .196, 202

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453, 494

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448

Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376

G-Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

INDEX 585

SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456

GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow

Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528

Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .142

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 148

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

10

586 INDEX

Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .142

Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529

Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527

Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

iPod Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

Jump Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 478

Ignition

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . .221, 224, 232, 234, 250

Key Fob

Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24

Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24


Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 361

Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 280

Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Lap History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

INDEX 587

Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Lap Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448

Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 542

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 137

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 94, 228

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 405

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544

Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546

Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 195

Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251, 252

Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

10

588 INDEX

Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 142

Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 545

Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 148

Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 195

License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .239

Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 195

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .145

Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 195

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542, 544

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .243, 442

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 141, 142, 250

Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .232, 250

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455, 457

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508

Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463

Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503

Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497

Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554, 556

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .239, 495

Manual

Backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 129

Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 129

Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Manual Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574

Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367, 521, 523

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 523

Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

INDEX 589

Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 195

Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519

Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 111

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442

MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496, 573

MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . .448, 549, 550

Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 498, 549, 550

10

590 INDEX

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547, 548

Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498

Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 549, 550

Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501

Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500

Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 547, 548

Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 547, 548

Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502

Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502

Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494

Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 574

Paddle Shifter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524

Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402

ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Passenger Seat

Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 289

Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .427

Power

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405

Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .208

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .151

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Power Seats

Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 551

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

INDEX 591

Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .516

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506

Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

10

592 INDEX

Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Remote Control

Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24

Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24


Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .320

Remote Starting

Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . .282

Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542

Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496

Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573

Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573

Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554

Seat Belt

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .53

Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 94

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 46, 48

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

INDEX 593

Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123, 124, 126, 130

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123, 124

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124, 130

Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 231

Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

10

594 INDEX

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550

Selection Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499

SENTRY KEY

FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571

Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574

Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372


Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 142, 250

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436

Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550

Specifications

Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549, 550

Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262, 263

Speed Control

Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 157

Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .153, 154, 157

SRT

Console Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

G-Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

Lap History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

Paddle Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262, 263

Top Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 359


Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

Steering

Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151

Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151

Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .320

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542

Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333, 542

Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542

INDEX 595

Stuck, Freeing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .56

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500

System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .331

Tilt

Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151

Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262, 263

SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 262, 263

Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .426, 427

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 431, 575

10

596 INDEX

Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431

Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431

High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 428

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .442

Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575

Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419, 431

Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436

Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

Tire Service Kit . . . .465, 466, 467, 470, 471, 473, 474, 475

To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Top Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 486, 487

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458

Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .458

Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457

Transfer Case

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372, 374, 521

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 549, 551

Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370, 372

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25

Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .24

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 42

Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 250

INDEX 597

Uconnect Access

Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346

Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .280

Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575

Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Uconnect

Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .282

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 282

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition

Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353

Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 455, 457

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19

Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333, 542

Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499

10

598 INDEX

Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462

Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572

Washer

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 147, 509

Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524

Water

Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526

Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 147, 509

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS

®

16D492-126-AA

©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.

Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

First Edition

Printed in U.S.A.